Contents

Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2014 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 282
1 of 282

Summary of Content for Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2014 Owner's Manual PDF

Owner's Manual. MINI Countryman. MINI Paceman.

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

COOPER COOPER S

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature. Set off now and have fun with your MINI. The MINI Team of BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English VI/13, 07 13 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 270.

6 Notes

At a glance 14 Cockpit 20 Onboard monitor 26 Voice activation system

Controls 32 Opening and closing 45 Adjusting 53 Transporting children safely 58 Driving 68 Displays 78 Lamps 82 Safety 93 Driving stability control systems 96 Driving comfort 99 Climate 104 Interior equipment 114 Storage compartments

Driving tips 122 Things to remember when driving 126 Loading 130 Saving fuel

Navigation 134 Navigation system 136 Destination entry 145 Destination guidance 153 What to do if...

Entertainment 156 Tone 158 Radio 166 CD/multimedia

Communication 180 Bluetooth hands-free system 190 Bluetooth mobile phone preparation

package 202 Office 210 MINI Connected

Mobility 216 Refueling 218 Fuel 220 Wheels and tires 232 Engine compartment 234 Engine oil 236 Coolant 237 Maintenance 239 Replacing components 248 Breakdown assistance 254 Care

Reference 260 Technical data 264 Short commands for voice activation

system 270 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Notes Using this Owner's Manual The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Additional sources of information Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information on MINI, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: www.mini.com

Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility of per sonal injury and serious damage to the vehicle. Marks the end of a specific item of informa tion. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se lect individual functions. ... Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac tivation system. ... Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele

vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor mation on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipment The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayeri sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW AG. This Owner's Manual describes all models, all series equipment, as well as country-specific and special equipment offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de scribes and depicts equipment that may not be contained in your vehicle because of the se lected special equipment or country version, for example. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup plementary Owner's Manuals. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illustra tions.

Status of this Owner's Manual at time of print ing The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Seite 6

Notes

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

For your own safety Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be oper ated in a different country it might be neces sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ ing operating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a cer tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre.

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair methods. Therefore, have this work performed only by a MINI service center or a workshop that works according to MINI repair procedures with ap propriately trained personnel.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and ac cessories approved by the manufacturer of the MINI. When you purchase accessories tested and approved by the manufacturer of the MINI and Original MINI Parts, you simultaneously ac quire the assurance that they have been thor oughly tested by the manufacturer of the MINI to ensure optimum performance when instal led on your vehicle. The manufacturer of the MINI warrants these parts to be free from de fects in material and workmanship. The manu facturer of the MINI will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by the manufac

turer of the MINI. The manufacturer of the MINI cannot test every product made by other man ufacturers to verify if it can be used on a MINI safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Original MINI Parts, MINI Accessories and other products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all MINI Dealers. Installation and operation of non-MINI approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detec tors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle with out using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar accesso ries, may cause extensive damage to the vehi cle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the MINI Limited Warranty. See your MINI Dealer for additional information. Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.

California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts, including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect

Seite 7

Notes

7Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or re gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi cle to meet different prevailing operating con ditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable war ranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Cus tomer Relations for further information.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas ures: MINI Maintenance system Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models

If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War ranty.

Data memory Numerous electronic components in your vehi cle contain data memories that store technical information on the vehicle condition, events and faults, either temporarily or permanently. This technical information generally documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment. Operating conditions of system compo

nents, such as filling levels. Status messages from the vehicle and its in

dividual components, such as wheel rpm/ speed, motion delay, transverse accelera tion.

Malfunctions and defects in important sys tem components, such as lights and brakes.

Vehicle responses to special driving situa tions, such as airbag deployment, use of the stability control systems.

Ambient conditions, such as the tempera ture.

These data are of a technical nature only and are used to detect and eliminate faults and to optimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre ated from these data. If services are used, for instance in the event of repairs, service proc esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc., this technical information can be read out from the event and fault data memories by service personnel, including the manufacturer, using special diagnosis tools. This service personnel can provide you with more information if needed. After troubleshooting, the information in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten continuously.

Seite 8

Notes

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Situations are conceivable during the use of the vehicle in which these technical data could be come associated with a specific person in com bination with other information, such as an ac cident report, damage to the vehicle, witness accounts, etc., possibly with the involvement of an authorized expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo calization in the event of an emergency, permit the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were

operating. Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened. How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal. How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re corded by the EDR under normal driving condi tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce ment, could combine the EDR data with the

type of personally identifying data routinely ac quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe rcar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone

Seite 9

Notes

9Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor ve hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety.

Seite 10

Notes

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Seite 11

Notes

11Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

WATCH ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

At a glance

Controls

Driving tips

Navigation

Entertainment

Communication

Mobility

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Cockpit Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Setting the exterior mirror, folding it in and out51

Power windows, front43

MINI Countryman: power win dows, rear43

MINI Countryman: safety switch for rear power windows44

2 Parking lamps78

Low beams78

Automatic headlamp con trol78 Adaptive Light Control80 Turn signal61

High beams61 Headlamp flasher61

Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Roadside parking lamps79

Computer69

3 Tachometer69 Instrument lighting80

Resetting the trip odometer68

4 Washer/wiper system61

5 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off58

6 Ignition lock58 7 Steering wheel buttons, right

Resuming cruise control97

Storing the speed and accelerat ing or slowing down97

Activating/deactivating cruise control96

Steering wheel buttons, left Volume

Bluetooth hands-free sys tem180 Bluetooth mobile phone prepara tion package190 Activate/deactivate the voice acti vation system26

Change the radio station Select a music track Scroll through the redial list

8 Horn, the entire surface 9 Adjust the steering wheel52 10 Releasing the hood233

Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance

15Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Displays

1 Tachometer69 with indicator and warning lamps17

2 Display for Current speed68 Indicator/warning lamps17

3 Resetting the trip odometer68 4 Display for

Automatic transmission position65 Computer69 Service requirements74

Odometer and trip odometer68 Flat Tire Monitor85 Tire Pressure Monitor85 Settings and information71 Personal Profile settings32

5 Instrument lighting80 6 Speedometer with indicator and warning

lamps17 7 Control Display20 8 Fuel gauge69

Seite 16

At a glance Cockpit

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Indicator/warning lamps The concept

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors in display area 1 or 2. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on, and light up briefly.

Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages You can call up more information, e.g., on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 75. In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active: Symbol Function or system

Turn signal, refer to page 61

High beams/headlamp flasher, refer to page 61

Front fog lamps, refer to page 80

DSC or DTC is regulating the propul sive forces in order to maintain driv ing stability, refer to page 93

The handbrake is set, refer to page 60

Engine malfunction with adverse ef fect on emissions, refer to page 238

Cruise control, refer to page 96

Seite 17

Cockpit At a glance

17Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

All around the center console

1 Hazard warning system 2 Speedometer with Control Display16 3 Radio158

CD/multimedia158 4 Air conditioning, automatic climate con

trol99 5 Buttons on the center console

Seat heating47

Central locking, inside36

Front fog lamps80

Sport button95

Driving stability control systems DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol93 DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol94

6 Storage compartment

Seite 18

At a glance Cockpit

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

All around the head liner

1 Indicator/warning lamps for the front pas senger airbags84

2 Reading lamps81

Ambient lighting color81

Glass sunroof, electrical41

Interior lamps81

All around the shift/ selector lever

1 MINI joystick with buttons21 2 USB audio interface170

Seite 19

Cockpit At a glance

19Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Onboard monitor Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

The concept The onboard monitor combines the functions of a large number of different switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location.

Using the onboard monitor during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.

Controls at a glance Controls

1 Control Display 2 MINI joystick with buttons

The buttons can be used to open the me nus directly. The MINI joystick can be used to select menu items and create settings.

Control Display

Notes To clean the Control Display, follow the care

instructions, refer to page 257. Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.

Switching off 1. Move the MINI joystick repeatedly to the

right until the "Options" menu appears. 2. "Switch off control display"

Switching on Press the MINI joystick to switch on.

Seite 20

At a glance Onboard monitor

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI joystick with buttons Select menu items and create settings.

1. Turn, arrow 1.

2. Press, arrow 2. 3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on the MINI joystick

Press the button Function

Opens the main menu.

Changes to another menu.

Operating concept Start screen In the radio ready state and higher, the follow ing message appears on the Control Display:

To hide the message: press the MINI joystick. The main menu is displayed. The message is automatically hidden after ap prox. 10 seconds.

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All onboard monitor functions can be called up via the main menu.

Seite 21

Onboard monitor At a glance

21Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the MINI joystick. A new menu is displayed or the function is per formed. With the button on the MINI joystick:

Press the button. The menu items of the main menu can be opened consecutively by pressing the button repeatedly.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. Move the MINI joystick to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previ ous panel is displayed.

Move the MINI joystick to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previ ous display.

Arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Move the MINI joystick to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed.

Opening the Options menu Move the MINI joystick repeatedly to the right until the "Options" menu appears.

Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control

display". Control options for the selected main

menu, e.g., for "Radio". If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, for instance "Store station".

Seite 22

At a glance Onboard monitor

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Changing settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set

ting is displayed.

3. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the set ting.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated. The function is deactivated.

Example: setting the clock Setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the MINI joystick until "Settings" is highlighted and press the MINI joystick.

3. If necessary, move the MINI joystick to the left to display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time/Date" is highlighted and press the MINI joystick.

5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and press the MINI joystick.

6. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and press the MINI joystick.

Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right:

Seite 23

Onboard monitor At a glance

23Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Time. Current entertainment source. Sound output, on/off. Wireless network reception strength. Telephone status. Traffic bulletin reception. Check Control messages and entries using the voice activation system temporarily hide the status information.

Status field symbols The symbols are grouped into various catego ries.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio is switched on.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes: searching for network.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Text message, e-mail was received.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD player.

AUX-IN port.

Symbol Meaning

USB audio interface.

Music interface for smartphones.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are switched off.

Entering letters and numbers General information 1. Turn the MINI joystick: select letters or

numbers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if

needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the MINI joystick: delete the let ter or number.

Press the MINI joystick for an ex tended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Enter a blank space.

Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering letters and numbers.

Seite 24

At a glance Onboard monitor

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering uppercase and lowercase let ters. Symbol Function

Move the MINI joystick forward: switch from upper to lower case letters.

Move the MINI joystick forward: switch from lower to upper case letters.

Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during the

entry for which data is available. Destination search: town/city names can be

entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display.

Seite 25

Onboard monitor At a glance

25Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Voice activation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

The concept Most functions that are displayed on the

Control Display can be operated with the voice activation system using spoken com mands. The system prompts you to make your entries.

Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us ing the voice activation system.

The system uses a special microphone in the headliner on the driver's side.

... Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation sys tem.

Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi fied. Set the language, refer to page 73.

Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the signal. This symbol on the Control Display indi

cates that the voice activation system is ac tive.

3. Say the command. The command appears on the Control Dis play.

If no other commands are available, operate the function via the onboard monitor in this case.

Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis play.

Seite 26

At a glance Voice activation system

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The functions of the main menu have short commands. Some list items, such as the phone book en tries, can also be selected via the voice activa tion system. Say the list items exactly as they are displayed on the list.

Having possible commands read aloud You can have the system read possible com mands aloud: Voice commands. For example, if the "CD" menu is displayed, the commands for the operating the CD player are read out loud.

Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, usually irrespective of which menu item is currently se lected, for instance Vehicle status. List of short commands of the voice activation system, refer to page 264.

Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: Help Additional commands for the help dialog: Help with examples: information about

the current operating options and the most important commands for them are an nounced.

Help with voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.

Example: playing back a CD Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken out loud, in the same way as they are selected via the MINI joystick.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. C D and multimedia The medium last played is played back.

4. C D 5. C D drive

The CD is played back.

6. Press the button on the steering wheel again to select a specific track.

7. Track ... e.g., CD track 4.

Via short commands Playback of the CD can also be started using a short command.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. C D drive Track ... e.g., CD track 4.

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form.

Seite 27

Voice activation system At a glance

27Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting.

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume knob while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed. The volume is stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Notes on Emergency Re quests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.

Environmental condi tions Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Seite 28

At a glance Voice activation system

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Seite 29

Voice activation system At a glance

29Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

HANDLE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

At a glance

Controls

Driving tips

Navigation

Entertainment

Communication

Mobility

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Opening and closing Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Remote control/key Buttons on the remote control

1 Opening tailgate 2 Unlocking 3 Locking

General information Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In vehicles equip ped with Comfort Access, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 41. The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re

mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Per sonal Profile, refer to page 32. In addition, information about service require ments is stored in the remote control, Service data in the remote control, refer to page 237.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to unlock the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks: Driver's door, refer to page 35.

New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center.

Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.

Personal Profile The concept You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Through Personal Profile, most of these set

tings are stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

While the vehicle is being unlocked, the re mote control is recognized and the settings

Seite 32

Controls Opening and closing

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

stored with it are called up and imple mented.

Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control.

The individual settings are stored for no more than three remote controls.

Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. More information on the settings can be found under: Response of the central locking system

when the car is being unlocked, refer to page 34.

Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 37.

Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 61.

Settings for the displays on the onboard monitor, in the speedometer, and in the tachometer: 12h/24h clock format, refer to

page 72. Date format, refer to page 73. Brightness of the Control Display, refer

to page 74. Language on the Control Display, refer

to page 73. Units of measure for fuel consumption,

distance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 72.

Light settings: Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer

to page 79. Daytime running lights, refer to

page 79. Automatic climate control, refer to

page 101: AUTO program, activating/deac tivating the cooling function, setting the

temperature, air volume, and air distribu tion.

Entertainment: Tone settings, refer to page 156. Volume, refer to page 156.

Central locking system The concept The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and re leases the locks on the following: Doors. Tailgate. Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside Via the remote control. Via the door lock. In cars with Comfort Access, via the door

handles on the driver's and front passenger sides.

The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote control: Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

anti-theft protection is switched on and off as well. The anti-theft protection makes it impossible to unlock the doors using the lock buttons or door handles.

The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and ambient lighting are switched on and off.

The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re fer to page 41.

Operating from the inside Via the switch/button for the central locking system, refer to page 36.

Seite 33

Opening and closing Controls

33Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

In an accident of the necessary severity, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control

General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Unlocking

Press the button. The vehicle is un locked. The welcome lamps and interior lamps are switched on. You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Unlock button"

4. Select the desired function: "All doors"

Press the button once: the en tire vehicle unlocks.

"Driver's door only"

Pressing the button once un locks only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. Pressing twice unlocks the entire vehicle.

Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the re mote control. The power windows are opened and the glass sunroof is raised. Convenient closing with the remote control is not possible.

Locking

Press the button. Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Seite 34

Controls Opening and closing

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Setting the confirmation signals Have unlocking or locking of the vehicle con firmed.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

4. Press the MINI joystick.

Switching on the interior lamps When the vehicle is locked:

Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your ve hicle in parking garages, etc.

Unlocking the tailgate

Press the button for approx. 1 second and then release it. The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available be fore opening.

Malfunctions The function of the remote control may be im paired by local radio waves. If this occurs, un lock and lock the vehicle at the door lock with the integrated key. If it should become impossible to lock the vehi cle with a remote control, the battery in the re mote control is discharged. Use this remote control on an extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to page 32.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following: FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This device may not cause harmful interfer

ence, and this device must accept any interference re

ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

Sets how the vehicle is to be unlocked, refer to page 34.

In some vehicle equipment versions, only the driver's door can be unlocked and locked via the door lock.

Seite 35

Opening and closing Controls

35Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl edge.

Locking the doors and tailgate at once To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail gate at once:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us ing the button for the central locking sys tem in the interior, refer to page 36.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas senger door, refer to page 37.

3. To lock the vehicle: Lock the driver's door using the

integrated key in the door lock, or Press down the lock button of the front

passenger door and close the door from the outside.

Convenient opening and closing In vehicles with an alarm system or Comfort Ac cess, the windows and the glass sunroof can be operated via the door lock.

Opening/closing Turn the key to the unlock or lock position and hold it there.

Keep the closing area clear Watch during the opening and closing

process to be sure that no one becomes trap ped. Releasing the key stops the motion.

Manual operation If an electrical malfunction occurs, the driver's door can be unlocked or locked by turning the integrated key to the end positions of the door lock.

Opening and closing: from the inside Operation via Switch in the center console:

Button in the driver's or front passenger door:

The graphic shows the button in the MINI Pace man as an example. The switch or the buttons can be used to lock or unlock the doors and tailgate when the doors are closed, but they are not theft-pro tected. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Seite 36

Controls Opening and closing

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Unlocking and opening doors Using the switch or the buttons for the cen

tral locking system, unlock all of the doors at once and then pull the door opener above the armrest, or

Pull the door handle on each door twice: the door is unlocked the first time and opened the second time.

Locking Press the switch/button or Push down the lock button of a door. To

avoid locking yourself out by accident, the driver's door cannot be locked at the lock button while the door is open.

Automatic locking In addition, it is possible to set the situations in which the vehicle locks. The setting is stored for the remote control in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Door locks" 3. Select a menu item:

"Lock if no door is opened" The central locking system locks after a short period if no door is opened.

"Lock after start. to drive" The central locking system locks when you start driving.

Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Tailgate Opening The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available be fore opening.

Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec tion.

Only drive with the tailgate fully closed; other wise, the tail lamps will be hidden from view and driving safety will be compromised. In some market-specific versions, the tailgate can only be unlocked using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first.

Opening from the inside

Press the button on the driver's footwell.

Seite 37

Opening and closing Controls

37Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI Countryman

Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow, or

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate is unlocked.

MINI Paceman

Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow, or

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate is unlocked.

Closing Keep the closing area clear Make sure that the closing area of the

tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may result.

Take the remote control with you Always take the remote control with you

when leaving the vehicle and do not place it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control may be locked into the vehicle when the tail gate is closed.

MINI Countryman

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tail gate.

MINI Paceman

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tail gate.

Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, e.g., in your

Seite 38

Controls Opening and closing

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically de tects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func tions: Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Unlocking of the tailgate separately. Starting the engine.

Functional requirements There are no external sources of interfer

ence in the vicinity. To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle. The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds. The engine can only be started if the re

mote control is inside the vehicle. The doors and tailgate must be closed to

operate the windows.

Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access. Notes on opening and closing, refer to page 32. If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing the windows or glass sunroof, the sys tem is checking whether a remote control is in side the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.

Unlocking

Press button 1.

Depending on the setting, either only the driv er's door or the entire vehicle is unlocked, refer to page 34. Pressing the button again locks the entire vehi cle again. Convenient opening with the remote control, refer to page 34.

Locking Press button 1. For Convenient closing, press and hold but ton 1. The windows and glass sunroof are closed in addition.

Unlocking the tailgate separately Press the top half of the MINI emblem. This corresponds to pressing the following but

ton on the remote control: . If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo area is detected in the locked vehicle after the tailgate is closed, the tailgate opens again slightly. The hazard warning system flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.

Power windows and electrical glass sunroof When the engine is switched off, the windows and the sunroof can be operated as long as neither the doors nor the tailgate are opened.

Seite 39

Opening and closing Controls

39Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

When the door and tailgate are closed again and the remote control is detected inside the vehicle, the windows and the sunroof can be operated again. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock to be able to operate the windows and the sun roof while the engine is switched off and the doors are open.

Switching on the radio ready state Press the Start/Stop button to switch on the radio ready state, refer to page 58. Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other wise, the engine will start.

Starting the engine The engine can be started or the ignition can be switched on, refer to page 58, when a re mote control is inside the vehicle. It is not nec essary to insert a remote control into the igni tion lock.

Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off with the selector lever in position P, refer to page 65. To switch off the engine with the selector lever in position N, the remote control must be in serted in the ignition lock.

Before driving a vehicle with automatic transmission into a car wash 1. Insert the remote control into the ignition

switch. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. Move the selector lever to position N. 4. Switch the engine off. The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction The Comfort Access functions can be disturbed by local radio waves, such as by a mobile phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote

control or when a mobile phone is being charged in the vehicle. If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition switch.

Warning lamps The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot be

started. The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a malfunction. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces sary, insert another remote control into the ig nition switch.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is run ning: the remote control is no longer in

side the vehicle. After switching off the engine, the engine can only be started again within approx. 10 sec onds if no door has been opened.

The indicator lamp lights up and a mes sage appears on the Control Display: re place the remote control battery.

Seite 40

Controls Opening and closing

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Replacing the battery The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Insert a new battery with the positive side facing upwards.

3. Press the cover closed. Return used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.

Alarm system The concept The enabled alarm system reacts to the follow ing: Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. Movements inside the vehicle. Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at

tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car. Interruptions in battery voltage. Depending on the market-specific version, the alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry attempts by: By sounding an acoustic alarm. By switching on the hazard warning system.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Interior motion sensor For the interior motion sensor to function prop erly, the windows and the glass sunroof must be closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the fol lowing situations: In duplex garages. During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer. When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the remote control twice in succession.

Lock the vehicle twice with the integrated key.

The LEDs flash in short succession for approx. 2 seconds. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor remain switched off until the ve hicle is unlocked and locked again.

Glass sunroof, electrical General information

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them selves.

Seite 41

Opening and closing Controls

41Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Convenient operation via: Door lock, refer to page 35 Comfort Access, refer to page 39

Tilting the glass sunroof MINI Countryman: Press the switch back to the resistance

point and hold. Both glass sunroofs are raised. Releasing stops the motion.

With the ignition switched on, press the switch back past the resistance point. Both closed glass sunroofs are raised fully. Pressing again stops the motion.

MINI Paceman: Press the switch back to the resistance

point and hold. The front glass sunroof is raised. Releasing stops the motion.

With the ignition switched on, press the switch back past the resistance point. The front glass sunroof is fully raised. Pressing again stops the motion.

Opening, closing MINI Countryman: In the raised position with the ignition

switched on, press the switch back and hold. The front glass sunroof is opened. The rear glass sunroof is closed.

Releasing stops the motion. The same method is used to close the glass sunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for ward. The front glass sunroof remains in the raised position. The rear glass sunroof is raised. Press ing again closes both sunroofs completely. MINI Paceman: In the raised position with the ignition

switched on, press the switch back and hold. The front glass sunroof is opened. Releasing stops the motion.

The same method is used to close the glass sunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for ward. The front glass sunroof remains in the raised position. Pressing again closes the roof com pletely.

Roller sunblind The roller sunblind can be opened and closed separately from the glass sunroof.

After a power failure After a power failure, it could happen that the sunroof can only be raised. In this case, have the system initialized. The manufacturer of your MINI recommends having this work performed by the service center.

Power windows General information

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Seite 42

Controls Opening and closing

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the power windows and in jure themselves.

If, after having been opened and closed a num ber of times in close succession, a window can only be closed, the system is overheated. Let the system cool down for several minutes with the ignition switched on or the engine running.

Opening, closing

Front windows

To open: Press the switch to the resistance point. The

window opens while the switch is held. Press the switch beyond the resistance

point. The window opens automatically in the radio ready state and higher. Press again briefly to stop the opening pro cedure.

To close: Pull the switch to the resistance point. The

window closes while the switch is held. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically. Pressing the switch stops the motion.

MINI Countryman: rear windows

To open: Press the switch to the resistance point. The

window opens while the switch is held. Press the switch beyond the resistance

point. The window opens automatically in the radio ready state and higher.

To close: Pull the switch to the resistance point. The

window closes while the switch is held. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically. Pressing the switch stops the motion.

After the ignition is switched off The windows can be operated for approx. 1 mi nute after the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off.

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the power windows and in jure themselves.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is inter rupted. The window reopens slightly.

Seite 43

Opening and closing Controls

43Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

Do not use window accessories Do not install any accessories in the range

of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.

Closing without the pinch protection system

Danger of pinching Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

If there is an external danger or, for example, if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, the window can be closed manually.

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec tion.

MINI Countryman: safety switch

With the safety switch, the rear windows are prevented from being opened or closed via the switches in the rear passenger area, such as by children. Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transporting

children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without supervi sion.

Seite 44

Controls Opening and closing

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Adjusting Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital con tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: Safety belts, refer to page 47 Head restraints, refer to page 50. Airbags, refer to page 82.

Seats Note before adjusting

Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat

while driving. The seat could respond with un expected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

Do not incline the backrest on the front passen ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.

Front seat adjustment

Forward/backward

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat into the desired position, arrows 2. After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly to make sure it engages prop erly.

Height

Pull the lever up or push it down repeatedly, ar rows 1, until the desired height is reached, ar rows .

Backrest MINI Countryman

Seite 45

Adjusting Controls

45Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

MINI Paceman

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, ar rows 2.

Lumbar support You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar re gion. The upper hips and spinal column receive sup plementary support to help you maintain a re laxed, upright sitting position.

The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as an example. Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur vature.

MINI Countryman: rear seat adjustment Observe the following when adjusting Do not adjust the rear seats during a trip;

otherwise, there is a risk of passenger injury. Make sure that the locking mechanisms of the rear seats engage properly. Otherwise the re straining effect of the safety belts during an ac cident could be reduced.

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desired position. Release the lever and move the seat slightly forward or back so that it engages properly.

Backrest Adjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 110.

Seite 46

Controls Adjusting

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI Paceman: entry in the rear

1. Pull the lever on the back of the seat up ward, arrow 1. The backrest folds forward.

2. Push against the backrest to move the seat forward, arrow 2.

To make it easier to enter the car in the rear, push back the safety belt on the lower belt guide rail if necessary.

Restoring the original seat position The driver's seat has a mechanical memory function for the forward/backward seat setting and the backrest setting.

1. Push the seat back to the original position. Do not fold back the backrest until the seat is in its original position; otherwise, the seat will engage in its current position. If this happens, adjust the forward/backward po sition manually, refer to page 45.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. Note the following when moving back the seat

When moving back the seat, ensure that per sons cannot be injured and objects cannot be damaged. Lock the front seats and front back rests before driving away; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident if the seat or backrest moves unexpectedly.

Seat heating

Switching on The temperature setting progresses one step through its control sequence each time you press the button. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes, the seat heating is activated automati cally with the temperature set last. The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to no heat in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.

Switching off Press the button longer.

Safety belts Number of safety belts Your vehicle has been fitted with four or five safety belts for the safety of you and your pas sengers. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.

Notes Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

Seite 47

Adjusting Controls

47Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.

Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka ble objects, or be pinched.

Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.

Buckling the belt MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle. The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 45.

Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Fastening the rear buckle tongues When the outer rear seats are not occupied, the buckle tongues of the rear seats can be slid up to the cargo area trim with the clip. This helps avoid annoying noises when driving.

MINI Countryman: center safety belt of rear seat The belt buckle embossed with the word CEN TER is intended exclusively for use by passen gers riding in the center position. If the center safety belt in the rear is used, the backrests must be locked, refer to page 111. The safety belt will not have a restraining effect if the backrest is not locked.

Belt holder in the headliner The holder for the safety belt is located in the headliner.

Seite 48

Controls Adjusting

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

1 Opening for the safety belt 2 Holder for the small buckle tongue

Take the small buckle tongue out of the holder. Move both buckle tongues downward.

Closing

Insert the small buckle tongue 2 of the safety belt into the small belt buckle 3.

Opening Press the red button on the small belt buckle 3 with buckle tongue 1. When the center safety belt is locked: Press the red button 3 with the buckle tongue of the outer left safety belt.

Putting on the belt

1 Large buckle tongue 2 Small buckle tongue 3 Small belt buckle 4 Large belt buckle

Buckle tongue 1 must be inserted in belt buckle 4. Make sure you hear the buckle tongue engage in the belt buckle. Insert the buckle tongue into the belt buckle in such a way that the belt lies smoothly against the body of the buckled person and is not twisted.

Stowing the center safety belt If the center seat is not occupied, insert the belt buckles 3 and 4 into the respective holders, ar rows.

Move the buckle tongues to the belt holder on the headliner, refer to page 48, and insert them into the provided holders.

Seite 49

Adjusting Controls

49Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

The indicator lamps light up and a sig nal sounds. In addition, a message ap pears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt has been fas

tened correctly.

Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.

Head restraints Correctly set head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level.

Height adjustment

To raise: pull. To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro tective function of the head restraint is unavail able.

Front 1. Pull upward as far as possible. 2. Fold the backrest back slightly. 3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re

straint all the way to the stop. 4. MINI Countryman: press the additional but

ton 2 using a suitable tool. 5. Pull out the head restraint. 6. Fold back the backrest.

Seite 50

Controls Adjusting

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Rear 1. Pull upward as far as possible. 2. Fold the backrest forward slightly. 3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re

straint all the way to the stop. 4. Press the additional button 2 using a suita

ble tool. 5. Pull out the head restraint completely. 6. Fold back the rear seat backrest.

Mirrors Exterior mirrors

General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's mirror.

Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.

At a glance

1 Adjusting 2 Selecting the left/right mirror 3 Folding the mirror in and out

Selecting a mirror To change to the other mirror: slide the mirror switch over.

Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed.

Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.

Folding the mirror in and out Press button 3. The mirror can be folded in up to a vehicle speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. For example, this is advantageous In car washes. In narrow streets. For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually. Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash,

fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de pending on the width of the vehicle.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on when the external temperature is below a certain value.

Seite 51

Adjusting Controls

51Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Interior rearview mirror

To reduce the blinding effect from the rear when driving at night: turn the knob.

Interior rearview and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature

Two photocells are used for control: In the mirror frame, see arrow. On the back of the mirror.

For proper operation: Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield. Do not apply stickers to the windshield in

front of the mirror.

Steering wheel Adjusting

Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi tion.

3. Fold the lever back. Do not use force to swing the lever back. Do not use force to swing the lever back

up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam aged.

Seite 52

Controls Adjusting

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

The right place for chil dren Notes

Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.

Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Transporting children in the rear Transport children younger than 13 years

of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear only, using child restraint fixing systems suita ble for the age, weight, and height of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.

Installing child seats Only install child seats in the rear when

the rear seat backrest is folded all the way back and engaged; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

Children on the front passenger seat

Front passenger airbags Should it be necessary to use a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated, refer to page 83.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Installing child re straint fixing systems Before mounting MINI Countryman: before mounting a child re straint fixing system on the rear seats, move the seats into the rearmost positions. Adjust the inclination of the center backrest to that of the respective outer backrest. After mounting the child restraint fixing system on the respective outer rear seat, adjust the backrest forward, if necessary, to ensure that the backrest is in contact with the child re straint fixing system. Rear seat backrests, refer to page 110.

Seite 53

Transporting children safely Controls

53Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Notes Manufacturer's information for child re straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro tective effect can be impaired.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating the airbags After installing a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, side, and knee airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re straint fixing system.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest po sition to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change this seat position once it has been set.

Child seat security

The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as an example. The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the front passenger can be locked to prevent ex tension in order to permit attachment of child restraint fixing systems.

To lock the safety belt 1. Secure the child restraint fixing system with

the belt. 2. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system.

The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com

pletely. Center safety belt: unlock belt buckle 3 in addition, refer to page 49. Guide the safety belt to the holder on the headliner.

LATCH child restraint fix ing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.

Seite 54

Controls Transporting children safely

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Notes Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix ing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufacturer; otherwise, the level of protection may be re duced.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the back rest; otherwise, the degree of protection of fered may be reduced.

Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child restraint fixing system.

MINI Countryman

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located at the points indicated by the arrows.

MINI Paceman

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located at the points indicated by the arrows.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re

fer to the operating instructions of the sys tem.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected.

Child restraint fixing systems with an upper re taining strap Mounting points

LATCH mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the upper

LATCH retaining strap to secure child restraint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.

There are two additional mounting points for child restraint fixing systems with an upper re taining strap, arrows.

Seite 55

Transporting children safely Controls

55Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI Countryman

There are two additional mounting points for child restraint fixing systems with an upper re taining strap, arrows.

MINI Paceman

There are two additional mounting points for child restraint fixing systems with an upper re taining strap, arrows.

Guide of the upper LATCH retaining strap

Retaining strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does

not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the event of an accident.

Outer seats:

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Cargo area floor 4 Hook for upper retaining strap 5 Mounting point 6 Backrest 7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix

ing system

MINI Countryman, center seat

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point 5 Cargo area floor 6 Backrest 7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix

ing system

Seite 56

Controls Transporting children safely

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Slide the head restraint upward. 2. Center seat: fold the cargo area floor for

ward. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint. 4. Attach the upper retaining strap to the

mounting point with the hook. 5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po

sition. 6. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.

MINI Countryman: lock ing doors and windows Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for power window This locks the rear window switches so that the windows cannot be operated from the rear. Press the safety switch, refer to page 44.

Seite 57

Transporting children safely Controls

57Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Ignition lock Insert the remote control into the ignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Radio ready state is switched on. Individual electrical consumers can operate.

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage.

Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism. The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Automatic transmission You can only take out the remote control if transmission position P is engaged: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig nition on or off and starts the engine.

The engine starts when the Start/Stop button is pressed and: Manual transmission: the clutch is de

pressed. Automatic transmission: the brake is de

pressed.

Radio ready state Individual electrical consumers can operate. Radio ready state is switched off automatically: When the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock. With Comfort Access, refer to page 38, by

pressing the button on the door handle or

the button on the remote control. After a certain period of time.

Ignition on All electrical consumers can operate. Most indi cator and warning lamps light up for different lengths of time.

Seite 58

Controls Driving

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Radio ready state and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps in the displays go out. The ignition switches off automatically when the driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/ Stop button again switches the ignition back on. For example, the ignition is not switched off in the following situations: Depress the clutch or brake pedal. The low beams are switched on

Starting the engine General information

Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.

Unattended vehicle Do not leave the car unattended with the

engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten tial source of danger. Before leaving the car with the engine running, shift to neutral or engage transmission posi tion P and set the handbrake firmly; otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Frequent starting in quick succession Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting

the car and avoid starting the car frequently in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, and there is the danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary; start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine.

Starting the engine

Manual transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 38.

1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Depress the clutch pedal. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a cer tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Automatic transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 38.

1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Move the selector lever to position P or N. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a cer tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Seite 59

Driving Controls

59Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Engine stop General information

Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam ple, cannot operate the windows and injure themselves.

Set the handbrake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the handbrake firmly when parking; other wise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

Before driving into a car wash To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an automatic car wash, follow the information on Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 254.

Switching off the engine

Manual transmission 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the handbrake firmly. 4. Remove the remote control from the igni

tion lock.

Automatic transmission 1. Engage transmission position P with the ve

hicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. 3. Set the handbrake firmly. 4. Remove the remote control from the igni

tion lock.

Handbrake The concept The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels. Also follow the instructions under Switching off the engine, refer to page 60.

Setting The lever engages automatically.

Releasing

Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the lever.

Notes Using the handbrake while driving If it should become necessary to use the

handbrake while driving, do not pull the hand brake too forcefully. Keep the button on the handbrake lever pressed at all times. Excessive application of the handbrake can block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of the vehicle.

The brake lamps do not light up when the handbrake is pulled.

Seite 60

Controls Driving

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher

1 Turn signal 2 Switching on the high beams 3 Switching off the high beams/headlamp

flasher

Turn signal Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Signaling a turn briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. This function can be activated or deactivated:

1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting"

3. "Triple turn signal"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Washer/wiper system Notes

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are

frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.

Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield Do not use the wipers on a dry wind

shield; otherwise, the wiper blades may wear more rapidly or become damaged.

At a glance

1 Switching on wipers 2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

Seite 61

Driving Controls

61Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or the rain sensor

4 Cleaning the windshield and headlamps

Switching on wipers Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released.

Normal wiper speed Press up once. The system switches to operation in the inter mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Press up twice or press once beyond the resist ance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Switching off wipers or brief wipe Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released. Brief wipe: press down once. To switch off normal wipe: press down

once. To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset. If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press the button, arrow 3.

The symbol is shown in the tachometer.

Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor 1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58. 2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym bol and "SET" are displayed.

Seite 62

Controls Driving

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

5. Press and hold the button until the display changes.

6. Press the button to select the desired sensi tivity.

7. Wait or hold the button until the display changes. The settings were stored.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3.

Cleaning the windshield and headlamps Pull the lever, arrow 4. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly. When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.

Do not use the washing facilities when the hood is open

Only use the washing facilities when the hood is fully locked; otherwise, the headlamp washer system may become damaged.

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated au tomatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

0 Resting position 1 Switching on intermittent wipe

Turn the cap to level 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

2 Cleaning the rear window with intermittent wipe Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold.

3 Cleaning the rear window in the resting po sition Turn the cap to level 3 and hold.

The rear window wiper does not move if the cap is in position 1 before the ignition is switched on. To switch on the rear window wiper:

1. Move the cap to its basic position. 2. Select the required position again.

Seite 63

Driving Controls

63Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Do not use the washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty

Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.

Washer fluid General information

Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause in

juries if used improperly. Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni tion. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the notes and instructions on the con tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Concen trate or the equivalent.

Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser voir.

The recommended minimum filling quantity is 0.2 US gal/1 liter. Fill with a mixture of window washing concen trate and water; if needed, add antifreeze ac cording to the manufacturer instructions. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio. Do not fill in undiluted window washing con centrate and do not fill in pure water; this could damage the washer system. Do not mix window washing concentrate from different manufacturers; this could cause the washer nozzles to clog.

Manual transmission

Pay attention to the shift plane When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.

Seite 64

Controls Driving

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance needs to be overcome.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears can also be shifted manually using Steptronic, refer to page 66.

Parking the vehicle Secure the vehicle Before leaving the vehicle with the en

gine running, move the selector lever to posi tion P and set the handbrake; otherwise, the vehicle will begin moving.

Disengaging the remote control To remove the remote control from the ignition lock, first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 58.

Selector lever positions P R N D M/S +

Displays in the tachometer

The selector lever position is displayed and the engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in manual mode.

Changing selector lever positions With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P.

When the vehicle is stationary, step on the brake before shifting out of P or N; other wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.

Press on the brake pedal until you start driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pres sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector lever positions R and P. To override the lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The front wheels are blocked.

R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral For example, engage this position in a car wash. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for ward gears are selected automatically.

Seite 65

Driving Controls

65Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Under normal operating conditions, fuel con sumption is lowest when you are driving in po sition D.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the accelerator beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the Sport program

Move the selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot.

The Sport program is activated and DS is dis played. This position is recommended for a per formance-oriented driving style. To deactivate the Sport program or manual mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Activating the M/S manual mode Move the selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot. Push the selector lever forward or backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The tachometer displays the engaged gear, e. g. M1. To shift up: press the selector lever back

ward. To shift down: press the selector lever for

ward.

The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Shifting gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. When the shift paddles on the steering

wheel are used to shift gears while in auto matic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.

If the shift paddles are not used to acceler ate or shift gears for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to au tomatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.

Pull one of the two shift paddles: The transmission shifts up.

Press one of the two shift paddles: The transmission shifts down.

The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Seite 66

Controls Driving

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Manually unlocking the selector lever lock If the selector lever is locked in position P al though the ignition is switched on, the brake is depressed, and the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be over ridden:

1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever. 3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever

until the sleeve is inside out. Pull off the plug-in cable connector if nec essary.

4. Insert the pulling hook 1 into the loop on the passenger side. The pulling hook is found in the vehicle document portfolio or in the pouch of the wheel change set, refer to page 245.

5. Pull the loop upward. 6. Move the selector lever into the desired po

sition, pressing the button on the front of the selector lever.

Set the handbrake Before manually unlocking the selector

lever lock, pull the handbrake firmly; otherwise, the vehicle may roll away and cause personal injury or property damage.

Seite 67

Driving Controls

67Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Displays Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Odometer, external tem perature display, clock At a glance

1 Current speed 2 Odometer, trip odometer, external temper

ature, time 3 Resetting the trip odometer

Press the button on the turn indicator lever to open information in display area 2. The following information is displayed consecu tively: Trip odometer Time External temperature

Trip odometer To display the trip odometer: briefly press knob 3. To reset the trip odometer: press knob 3 while the trip odometer is being displayed and the ig nition is switched on.

Time Set the time, refer to page 72.

External temperature, external temperature warning If the display drops to +37 /+3 , a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is the increased danger of ice.

Ice on roads Even at temperatures above

+37 /+3 , there can be a risk of ice on roads. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan ger of an accident.

Units of measure To set the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer and or for the exter nal temperature, refer to page 72.

Seite 68

Controls Displays

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Tachometer

It is imperative that you avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis play. Check the coolant level, refer to page 236.

Fuel gauge

The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler flap. The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.

Notes on refueling, refer to page 216. Filling capacities, refer to page 263.

Range After the reserve range is reached: The remaining LEDs change from orange to

red, arrow. A message is briefly displayed on the Con

trol Display. The remaining range is shown on the tach

ometer. When a dynamic driving style is used, such

as when corners are taken rapidly, engine functions are not ensured.

The message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly At the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur.

Computer Opening information in the tachometer

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

Overview of the information The following information is displayed consecu tively by repeatedly pressing the button on the turn indicator lever: Range. Average fuel consumption. Current fuel consumption. Average speed.

Seite 69

Displays Controls

69Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

To set the corresponding units of measure, re fer to page 72.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 18 miles/30 km.

Average fuel consumption This is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. With the trip computer, refer to page 70, the average consumption can be displayed for an additional distance. To reset the average consumption: press the button on the turn indicator lever for ap prox. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel consumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the engine was switched off manually are not included in the average speed calculations. With the trip computer, refer to page 70, the average speed can be displayed for an addi tional distance. To reset the average speed: press the button on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec onds.

Displays on the Control Display Display the computer or trip computer on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Displays on the "Onboard info":

Range. Distance to destination. Estimated time of arrival if a destination

was entered in the navigation system. Displays on the "Trip computer":

Departure time. Trip duration. Trip distance. Both displays show: Average fuel consumption. Average speed.

Seite 70

Controls Displays

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed Resetting the values for average speed and average fuel consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press the MINI joystick.

2. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm your selection.

Resetting the trip computer Resetting all values:

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset"

Settings and information Operating concept Some settings and information can only be cre ated or opened while the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is standing, and the doors are closed.

1 Button for: Selecting the display. Setting values. Confirming the selected display or set

values. Calling up computer information69.

Symbol Function

Set the rain sensor, refer to page 62.

Open Check-Control, refer to page 75.

Exit the menu.

Exiting displays

1. Press the button on the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.

2. Hold the button down. The current speed is displayed again. Displays are also exited if no entries are made within approx. 8 seconds.

Seite 71

Displays Controls

71Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Next setting or information

1. Within a setting or information display, press the button on the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.

2. Hold the button down. Direct change to the next setting or piece of in formation.

Units of measure The units of measure, such as for fuel consump tion, route/distance, and temperature, can be changed. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units"

3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit.

Clock Setting the time 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and press the MINI joystick.

5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and press the MINI joystick.

The time is stored.

Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date"

Seite 72

Controls Displays

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the time zone 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone:" 4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired time

zone is displayed and press the MINI joy stick.

The time zone is stored.

Date Setting the date 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired day

is displayed and press the MINI joystick. 5. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year. The date is stored.

Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Settings on the Control Display Language

Setting the language 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re fer to page 27.

Seite 73

Displays Controls

73Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Brightness The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, the basic setting can be changed when the low beams are switched on.

1. "Settings" 2. "Control display" 3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set ting is selected.

5. Press the MINI joystick. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use. Depending on the light conditions, the bright ness control may not be clearly visible.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service spe cialist.

Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required" Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed. Additional information can be displayed on each entry: Select the entry and press the MINI joystick. To exit from the menu: Move the MINI joystick to the left.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a le gally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has al ready passed.

Seite 74

Controls Displays

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the required inspections. Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required"

4. " Vehicle inspection"

5. Open the menu for entering the deadline. 6. "Date:" 7. Create the settings. 8. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.

The year is highlighted. 9. Turn the MINI joystick to create the setting. 10. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.

The date entry is stored. To exit from the menu: Move the MINI joystick to the left.

Check Control The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys tems being monitored. A Check Control message consists of indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal and text messages at the top of the Control Dis play.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors in display area 1 or 2.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

The symbol indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. The Check Control messages can be displayed later.

Seite 75

Displays Controls

75Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display in combination with a symbol in the in strument cluster explain a Check Control mes sage and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the mal function is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed con secutively.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Other Check Control messages are hidden au tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However, they are stored and can be displayed again later.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Viewing stored Check Control messages The stored Check Control messages can only be displayed while the driver's door is closed.

1. Press the button on the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

2. Press and hold the button until the display changes.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" ap pear on the display.

4. Press and hold the button. If there is no Check Control message, this is indicated by "CHECK OK. If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding message is dis played.

Seite 76

Controls Displays

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The text message is also displayed on the Control Display.

5. Press the button to check for other mes sages.

Displaying on the Control Display 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control"

4. Select the text message.

Seite 77

Displays Controls

77Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Lamps Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

At a glance

0 Lamps off / daytime running lights 1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights 2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps 3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive

Light Control, daytime running lights, and welcome lamps

Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp con trol General information When the driver's door is opened with the igni tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto matically switched off when the light switch is in position 0, 2, or 3.

Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch position 1.

Parking lamps Switch position 1: the vehicle lamps light up on all sides. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 79.

Low beams Switch position 2: the low beams are lit when the ignition is switched on.

Automatic headlamp control Switch position 3: the low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the am bient light, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. Adaptive Light Control is active. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. The low beams remain switched on independ ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the front fog lamps.

Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg ment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.

Seite 78

Controls Lamps

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

When the daytime running lights are activated, the low beams are always switched on in switch position 3 when the ignition is switched on. The exterior lighting goes out automatically af ter the vehicle is switched off.

High beams/roadside parking lamps

1 Turn signal/roadside parking lamp 2 Switching on the high beams 3 Switching off the high beams/headlamp

flasher

To assist in parking, the vehicle can be illumi nated on one side; note the country-specific regulations. The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not have enough power to start the en gine.

Switching on the roadside parking lamp To switch on the roadside parking lamp on the left or right, press the turn indicator lever up or down after switching off the vehicle, arrow 1.

Switching off the roadside parking lamp Press the lever up or down to the resistance point.

Daytime running lights The daytime running lights light up in switch position 0, 1, or 3 when the ignition is switched on.

The exterior lighting goes out automatically af ter the vehicle is switched off. In switch position 1, the parking lamps light up after the ignition is switched off.

Activating/deactivating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Daytime running lamps"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Welcome lamps If the light switch stays in switch position 2 or 3 after the vehicle is switched off, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up for a cer tain period when the vehicle is unlocked.

Headlamp courtesy delay feature The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.

Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting"

Seite 79

Lamps Controls

79Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. "Pathway light.: s"

4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Adaptive Light Control The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

Activating With the ignition switch on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 78. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap tive Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, Adaptive Light Control is not active.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. Adap tive Light Control is malfunctioning or

has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Fog lamps At a glance

To switch on the front fog lamps: press the switch. To switch off, press the respective switch up ward or downward again.

Fog lamps The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on. The green indicator lamp lights up when the front fog lamps are switched on. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front fog lamps are switched off when the headlamp flasher or the high beams are activated. If the automatic headlamp control is activated, refer to page 78, the low beams are switched on automatically when the front fog lamps are switched on.

Instrument lighting The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. The brightness is increased to a certain limit and is then reduced again.

Seite 80

Controls Lamps

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Press the button briefly: the brightness changes in stages.

Press and hold the button: the brightness changes continuously.

Interior lamps The interior lamps, the footwell lamps and the cargo area lamp are controlled automatically. To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the vehicle are switched off some time after the ignition is switched off.

Switching interior lamps on/off manually

To switch the interior lamps on/off: press the switch.

If the interior lamps are to remain switched off, press the switch for approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lamps Reading lamps are located in the front next to the interior lamp and in the rear.

Switching the reading lamps on/off Front: press the switch. Rear: press the button.

Ambient lighting The color and brightness of the ambient light ing can be changed.

Press the switch forward: the color changes in steps. Press the switch back: the brightness changes in steps.

Intermediate settings and intermediate colors are possible. For continuously changing colors of the ambi ent lighting, press the switch forward for more than 10 seconds.

Seite 81

Lamps Controls

81Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Safety Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Airbags The graphic shows the MINI Paceman as an ex ample.

1 Front airbags 2 Knee airbag

3 Side airbag 4 Head airbags

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade quate restraint.

Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Seite 82

Controls Safety

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on how to ensure the opti mal protective effect of the airbags

Keep at a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig gered.

There should be no people, animals, or ob jects between an airbag and a person.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation in struments and mobile phones.

Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.

Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Do not remove the steering wheel. Do not apply adhesive materials to the air

bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.

Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.

Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear ing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explo sives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys tem could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.

Warning notices and information about the air bags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas senger seat is occupied by measuring the elec trical resistance of the human body. The front, side, and knee airbags on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated ac cordingly by the system. The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 84, shows the current status of the front passenger airbags, deacti vated or activated.

Seite 83

Safety Controls

83Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps

his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function prop erly.

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front passen ger seat, read the safety and operating instruc tions under Transporting children safely, refer to page 53.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi cator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To make sure that occupation of the seat cush ion can be detected correctly: Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion

padding, ball mats, or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifi cally recommended by the manufacturer of your MINI.

Do not place electronic devices on the pas senger seat if a child restraint fixing system is mounted on the seat.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac tivated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passen ger side are not activated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated.

Most child seats are detected by the system, Especially the child seats required by NHTSA at the time that the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.

Seite 84

Controls Safety

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Operational readiness of airbag system

In the radio ready state and beyond, re fer to page 58, the warning lamp lights up briefly to indicate that the entire air

bag system and the belt tensioners are opera tional.

Airbag system malfunction Warning lamp does not light up in the radio

ready state. Warning lamp remains permanently on.

Have the airbag system checked without delay if there is a malfunction

In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise, there is the risk that the system will not func tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe ac cident occurs.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires. The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individ ual wheels while moving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en sured. Initialize the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: When the system has not been initialized. When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface. Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration. When driving with snow chains.

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"

Seite 85

Safety Controls

85Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization The initialization process adopts the set infla tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine, but do not start driving. 5. Start the initialization with "Reset". 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initi alization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 228, are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the inflation pressure in all four tires. The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys tem, refer to page 229, can be used for this purpose. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys tem, refer to page 229.

Seite 86

Controls Safety

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Run-flat tires You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation

pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is ap prox. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater de pending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop erties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The tire inflation pressure is measured in the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirements The system must have been reset while the in flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en sure that the system will operate properly. Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad vance.

The system does not operate correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated despite correct tire inflation pres sures.

Seite 87

Safety Controls

87Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire: For a mounted wheel without TPM elec

tronics. When the TPM is disturbed by other sys

tems or devices with the same radio fre quency.

Status display 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"

The status is displayed.

Status indicator on the Control Display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires. A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account. A correction is only necessary if this is indicated by the TPM

Wheels, green The tire inflation pressure is equal to the target state. "TPM active" is displayed on the onboard moni tor.

One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure

in several tires. The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys tem is being reset.

Wheels, gray The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: TPM is being reset. Disturbance by systems or devices with the

same radio frequency. Malfunction.

Resetting the system Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Start the initialization with "Reset". 6. Drive away. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed. After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The resetting process is

Seite 88

Controls Safety

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

completed automatically as you drive. On the Control Display, the tires are shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is displayed again. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the process resumes auto matically. If a flat tire is detected while the system is re setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is shown.

Low tire pressure message The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message is displayed on the onboard monitor. In addition, a signal sounds.

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of infla tion pressure on the indicated wheel.

The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues warnings based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 228, are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec essary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility System, refer to page 229, can be used for this purpose. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. Reset the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys tem, refer to page 229. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys tem, may damage the TPM wheel electron ics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if necessary.

Run-flat tires You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. Reset the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions.

Seite 89

Safety Controls

89Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is ap prox. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater de pending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop erties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Message when not reset The yellow warning lamp lights up. A message is displayed on the onboard monitor.

The system detected a wheel change but was not yet reset. Warnings regarding the current tire inflation pressure are not reliable. Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, refer to page 88.

Malfunction The small warning lamp flashes in yel low and then lights up continuously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yel low.

On the onboard monitor, the tires are shown in gray and a message appears.

No flat tire can be detected. Display in the following situations: A wheel without TPM electronics is

mounted: Have the system checked by the service center if necessary.

Malfunction: Have the system checked.

TPM could not be fully reset; reset the sys tem again.

The small warning lamp flashes in yel low and then lights up continuously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yel low.

On the onboard monitor, the tires are shown in gray and a message appears.

No flat tire can be detected. Display in the following situation: Disturbance by other systems or devices

with the same radio frequency After leaving the area of the disturbance, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

Seite 90

Controls Safety

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.). As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continu ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va riety of reasons, including the installation of re placement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Speed limit The concept Enter a speed for which a Check Control mes sage will be displayed when the speed is reached. This enables you to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area, for example. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the MINI joystick to accept the setting. 5. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. The limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed"

Seite 91

Safety Controls

91Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. "Select current speed"

4. Press the MINI joystick. The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning"

4. Press the MINI joystick.

Seite 92

Controls Safety

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Steerability is maintained even during full brak ing. This increases active driving safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en gine.

Electronic brake-force distribution EBV The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

CBC Cornering Brake Control When braking in curves or during a lane change, driving stability and steering response are improved further.

Brake assistant When the brakes are applied rapidly, this sys tem automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. In this way, the system helps keep the braking distance as short as possible. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of full braking.

Dynamic Stability Con trol DSC The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels. DSC is operational every time you start the en gine.

Adjust your driving style to the situation An appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Do not reduce the additional safety margin with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk of an accident.

Deactivating DSC

Press the switch until the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in the speedometer and DSC OFF

Seite 93

Driving stability control systems Controls

93Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

appears in the tachometer. DSC is deactivated. Intervening measures to stabilize the vehicle and give it forward momentum are no longer executed.

When driving with snow chains or to rock the vehicle free of snow, it may be useful to deacti vate DSC temporarily. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC Press the switch again; the DSC indicator lamps in the display elements go out.

Indicator/warning lamps The indicator lamp in the tachometer flashes: DSC is controlling the drive forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has failed.

The indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up and DSC OFF appears in the tachometer.

DSC and DTC deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Con trol DTC The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized.

The system ensures maximum forward mo mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim ited. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri ate caution. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in

slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces

When rocking a vehicle free or starting off in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground

When driving with snow chains.

Activating DTC

Press the switch; the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in the speedometer and TRACTION appears in the tachometer. Dynamic Stability Control DSC is deactivated, Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC Press the switch again; the DSC OFF indicator lamp in the speedometer and TRACTION in the tachometer go out.

Indicator/warning lamps The indicator lamp in the tachometer flashes: DTC is controlling the drive forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has failed.

Seite 94

Controls Driving stability control systems

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up and TRACTION appears in the tachometer.

DTC is activated.

Hill drive-off assistant This system supports driving away on gradients. The handbrake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive away without delay.

Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.

ALL4 all-wheel system ALL4 is the all-wheel system of your MINI. The combined effects of ALL4 and DSC further opti mize the traction and dynamic driving charac teristics. The ALL4 all-wheel system variably distributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles depending on the driving situation and prevailing road conditions.

Sport button When this button is pressed, the vehicle re sponds in an even sportier manner. The engine responds more spontaneously

to accelerator movements. The steering responds more directly. Cooper S, John Cooper Works: the engine

sounds sportier when coasting. For automatic transmissions: more rapid

gear changes in the Sport program.

Activating the system

Press the switch; the LED in the button lights up and SPORT is displayed briefly in the tachome ter.

Deactivating the system Press the switch again. Switch the engine off.

Seite 95

Driving stability control systems Controls

95Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Driving comfort Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Cruise control The concept The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle stores and maintains the speed specified using the controls on the steering wheel.

Do not use cruise control Do not use the system if unfavorable con

ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant speed, for instance: On curvy roads. In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.

Controls

At a glance

1 Maintaining, storing, and increasing the speed

2 Activating/deactivating cruise control 3 Maintaining, storing, and reducing the

speed 4 Resuming cruise control

Switching on Press button 2.

The indicator lamp lights up in the speedometer. Cruise control is ready to operate and can be activated.

Switching off Press button 2. When activated: press twice. When interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored target speed is cleared.

Interrupting Press button 2. The system is interrupted automatically if The brakes are applied. The clutch pedal is depressed.

Seite 96

Controls Driving comfort

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The transmission position D is disengaged. DSC intervenes.

Maintaining, storing the current speed Press button 1 or button 3. The current speed is maintained and stored. It is displayed briefly in the tachometer. On downhill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if the engine braking power is insufficient. On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if the engine power output is insufficient.

Increasing speed Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired

speed is reached. Each time the button is pressed, the speed increases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Press and hold button 1 until the desired speed is reached. The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the achieved speed is maintained and stored.

Decreasing speed Press button 3 repeatedly or hold it until the desired speed is reached. The functions are the same those when the speed is increased, only that the speed is re duced.

Resuming a speed stored beforehand Press button 4. The last stored speed is resumed and main tained. The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off.

Display in the tachometer

The selected speed is displayed briefly.

If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op erate the system.

For better control The indicator lamp lights up in the speedometer. Cruise control is ready to operate and can be activated.

Malfunction The warning lamp in the tachometer lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. The system is malfunc

tioning or has failed.

Park Distance Control PDC The concept PDC provides support when parking in reverse. Signal tones and a visual display indicate that the vehicle is approaching an object behind it. Measurements are made by four ultrasound sensors in the bumpers. The range of these sensors is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: By the two corner sensors at ap

prox. 24 in/60 cm.

Seite 97

Driving comfort Controls

97Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

Avoid driving quickly with PDC PDC is a parking aid that can display ob

jects when the vehicle approaches them slowly, as is the case during parking maneuvers. Avoid driving toward an object quickly as the system may then be too late in issuing a warning for technical reasons.

Automatic operation The system is activated after approx. one sec ond when reverse gear or selector lever posi tion R is engaged while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Await this short pe riod before setting the vehicle into motion.

Signal tones The closer the vehicle is to the object, the shorter the intervals become. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If the distance remains constant, for example when driving parallel to a wall, the signal tone is stopped after approx. 3 seconds.

PDC with visual warning Displaying the approach to an object on the Control Display. The contours of distant objects are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone is output. The display is shown on the Control Display as soon as reverse gear or selector lever position R is engaged.

System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci dent could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range.

Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. PDC is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the

system checked.

To ensure full functionality of the sensors, keep the sensors clean and free of ice. When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sen sors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Seite 98

Controls Driving comfort

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Climate Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Air conditioning

1 Air volume 2 Cooling function 3 Recirculated air mode 4 Temperature

5 Rear window defroster 6 Vent settings 7 Windshield heating

Air volume Vary the air volume. The higher the rate, the more effective the heating or cooling will be. The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower may be switched

off entirely to save on battery power.

Switching the system on/off Turn the rotary switch for the air volume to 0. The blower and air conditioner are completely switched off and the air supply is cut off. Set any air volume to switch on the air condi tioning.

Seite 99

Climate Controls

99Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Cooling function The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running. The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air

before reheating it as required, according to the temperature setting. The cooling function helps to prevent conden sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. To cool the air faster and more intensively when external temperatures are high, switch on the recirculated air mode.

Recirculated air mode If the air outside the car has an unpleasant odor or contains pol lutants, shut off the supply to the interior of the car temporarily. The system then recirculates the

air currently within the vehicle.

Should the windows fog up in the recirculated- air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off the recirculated-air mode and increase the air volume if necessary. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield. Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti vated at low external temperatures.

Only use recirculated air mode for a lim ited period

The recirculated air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods; otherwise, the quality of the air inside the car will gradually deteriorate.

Temperature Turn upward, red, to raise the temperature. Turn downward, blue, to lower the temperature.

Rear window defroster The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. The rear window defroster power may be lowered or even

switched off entirely to save on battery power.

Vent settings Direct the flow of air to the win dows , to the upper body area , or to the footwell . Intermediate positions are possi ble.

Windshield heating The windshield heating switches off automatically after some time. The windshield heating may be reduced or even switched off en

tirely to save on battery power.

Defrosting and defogging windows 1. Set the maximum air volume. 2. Air distribution in position .

By switching on the cooling function, the windows are defogged more rapidly.

3. Set the highest temperature, red. 4. Deactivate recirculated air mode. 5. Switch on the windshield heating if neces

sary. 6. Switch on the rear window defroster if nec

essary.

Seite 100

Controls Climate

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Microfilter The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The mi crofilter is changed by the service center during routine maintenance work.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec

tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. The service center replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance.

Automatic climate control

1 Air volume, manual 2 AUTO program 3 Recirculated air mode 4 Maximum cooling 5 Manual air distribution 6 Temperature

7 Defrosting windows and removing conden sation

8 Cooling function 9 Rear window defroster 10 Windshield heating

Comfortable interior climate The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis tribution and air volume for virtually all condi tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select a comfortable interior temperature only.

The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options. Most of these settings are stored for the remote control in use, Personal Profile settings, refer to page 33.

Seite 101

Climate Controls

101Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Air volume, manual Press the button to reduce the air volume. Press the + button to increase the air volume. The automatic mode for the air volume can be switched on

again using the AUTO button.

The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery power. The display remains the same.

Switching the system on/off Reduce the air volume by pressing the button until the system is switched off. All displays go out. Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic climate control back on.

AUTO program The AUTO program automati cally adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and side win dows, toward the upper body area, and into the footwell. The

air volume and your specifications for the tem perature are adjusted to outside influences due to the seasons, e. g., solar radiation. The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. The program is switched off if the air distribu tion is manually adjusted or the button is pressed again.

Recirculated air mode If the air outside the car has an unpleasant odor or contains pol lutants, shut off the supply to the interior of the car temporarily. The system then recirculates the

air currently within the vehicle.

Should the windows fog up in the recirculated- air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off

the recirculated-air mode and increase the air volume if necessary. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield. Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti vated at low external temperatures.

Only use recirculated air mode for a lim ited period

The recirculated air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods; otherwise, the quality of the air inside the car will gradually deteriorate.

Maximum cooling Automatic climate control switches to the lowest tempera ture, a high air volume, and re circulated air mode. For maximum cooling, open the

vents for the upper body area.

The air is cooled as quickly as possible: At an external temperature above

32 /0 . When the engine is running.

Manual air distribution The flow of air is directed, as se lected, to the windows, to the upper body area, or to the foot well. The automatic mode for the air

distribution can be switched back on using the AUTO button.

Temperature Set the desired temperature in dividually. The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of

the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.

Seite 102

Controls Climate

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

When switching between different temperature settings in rapid succession, the automatic cli mate control does not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Rear window defroster The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper wires are used as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Defrosting and defogging windows Quickly removes ice and con densation from the windshield and front side windows. For this purpose, also switch on the cool ing function.

The windshield heating switches on automati cally.

Windshield heating The windshield heating switches off automatically after some time.

Cooling function The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before reheating it as required, according to the temperature setting. The passenger compart

ment can only be cooled with the engine run ning.

The cooling function helps to prevent conden sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. Recir culated air mode is switched on automatically if necessary. The cooling function is switched on automati cally when the AUTO button is pressed.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. The service center replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance.

Ventilation

1 Knob for continuous opening and closing 2 Nozzle for direction of air flow

Opening/closing Turn the knob.

Direction of air flow Pivot the entire nozzle.

Seite 103

Climate Controls

103Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Interior equipment Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Universal garage door opener The concept The universal garage door opener can be used to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control led systems, such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate it, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed for the desired functions. The hand-held trans mitter for the system is needed for the pro gramming procedure.

During programming During programming and before activat

ing a device using the Universal Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani mals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for security reasons.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag ing or in the operating instructions of the system being operated, the system

is generally compatible with the universal ga rage door opener. If you have any questions, please contact: Your service center. www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Controls on the interior rearview mirror

1 LED 2 Buttons 3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro

gramming.

Programming

General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:

Press the right and left buttons on the inte rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All programmed settings of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror are deleted.

Seite 104

Controls Interior equipment

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The re quired distance depends on the particular hand-held transmitter.

4. Press the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button being programmed on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at first.

5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, release both buttons. Rapid flashing indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec onds, change the distance between the in terior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Multiple trials at different distances may be neces sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between tri als.

6. To program additional functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be operated with the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.

Special characteristics of alternating- code radio systems If the system cannot be operated after re peated programming, check whether the sys tem to be operated uses an alternating-code system. Read the operating instructions of the system or press and hold the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds, the system is equipped with an alternating- code system. This flashing LED pattern repeats itself for approx. 20 seconds.

In systems with an alternating-code system, the universal garage door opener and the system must be additionally synchronized. Please obtain additional information on syn chronization in the operating instructions of the system being set up. The systems will be easier to synchronize with the aid of a second person. Synchronization:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re mote-controlled system.

2. Program the corresponding button on the interior rearview mirror as described.

3. Identify and press the synchronization but ton on the system being set up. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Press and hold the button on the interior rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and then release it. Repeat this step up to three times if necessary to complete the synchro nization procedure. When synchronization is completed, the programmed function is executed.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis

tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from the memory buttons. The required distance depends on the par ticular hand-held transmitter.

3. Press the memory button of the universal garage door opener.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit button on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes rapidly. If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap prox. 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step.

Seite 105

Interior equipment Controls

105Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af ter approx. 60 seconds, change the dis tance and repeat the step. If programming was aborted by the hand-held transmitter, hold down the memory button and press and release the button on the hand-held transmitter several times for 2 seconds.

Controls Prior to operation Before operating a unit with the Universal

Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear view mirror with the engine running or the igni tion switched on. When you are within the re ception range of the system, press and hold the button until the function is initiated. The LED on the interior rearview mirror lights up continu ously while the radio signal is being transmit ted.

Deleting stored functions Press the right and left buttons on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions can not be deleted individually.

Digital compass

1 Adjustment button on the back of the mir ror

2 Display

The display shows the main or secondary com pass direction in which the vehicle is traveling.

Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen. The following adjustment op tions are displayed one after the other, de pending on how long the adjustment button is pressed: Press briefly: switch the display on/off. 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone. 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass. 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand

steering. 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.

Setting compass zones Set the compass zone corresponding to the ve hicle's geographic location so that the compass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.

Seite 106

Controls Interior equipment

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Press the adjustment button for 34 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display. To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre sponding to the current location. The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations: An incorrect compass direction is shown. The cardinal direction displayed does not

change even if the direction of travel changes.

Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob

jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity of the vehicle and that there is enough space to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone. 3. Press the adjustment button for 67 sec

onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali brated, the C is replaced by the compass di rections.

Right-hand/left-hand steering The digital compass is set for right-hand or left- hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language Press the adjustment button for 1213 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English "E" and German "O". The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.

Seite 107

Interior equipment Controls

107Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Cupholders and ashtray/ lighter

Cupholders Two cupholders are located in the center con sole in the front. MINI Countryman: two additional cupholders are located at the end of the center console in the rear. Additional cupholders can be installed on the center rail.

MINI Paceman: additional cupholders are lo cated in the console between the rear seats.

Depending on the equipment, additional cu pholders can be installed on the center rail.

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.

Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain

ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam age.

Ashtray The ashtray is located in one of the cupholders in the center console at the front.

Emptying Take out the entire ashtray, arrow. When installing, ensure that the ashtray is in serted in the cupholder with the adapter.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.

Seite 108

Controls Interior equipment

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Connecting electrical de vices The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run ning or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volt. Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to the

socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the battery.

Replace the cover after use Replace the lighter or socket cover after

use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lighter socket or power socket could cause a short cir cuit.

Socket in the center console Remove the cover or lighter, refer to page 108, from the socket.

Socket in the rear

MINI Countryman

Take out the cover.

MINI Paceman

Take out the cover.

Socket in the cargo area

MINI Countryman

Take out the cover.

MINI Paceman

Take out the cover.

Seite 109

Interior equipment Controls

109Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Cargo area Cargo cover

Do not place objects on the covers Do not place objects on the cover; if you

do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or damage the cover.

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised. To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re moved.

1. Detach the securing straps from the tail gate.

2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it back and out of the bracket, arrow 2.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

MINI Countryman: rear seat backrests Danger of pinching Before folding down the rear seat back

rests, ensure that path of movement of the backrests is clear. Especially when the middle section is folded down, ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the path of move ment of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, in juries or damage may result.

Observe the instructions concerning the safety belt

Observe the instructions concerning the safety belt, refer to page 47. Otherwise, personal pro tection may be compromised.

The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40-20-40. When the outer rear seat backrests are folded down, it is not permissible for a person to travel on the center seat. Remove the third head restraint, refer to page 50, if necessary. Open the center safety belt and insert it in the belt holder on the headliner, refer to page 48. Enlarge the cargo area by adjusting the rear seat backrests to a more upright position. The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different positions between the comfort and transport positions and they can be folded down. In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted back to the greatest possible angle and in the transport position they are nearly vertical.

Seite 110

Controls Interior equipment

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Before beginning with the mounting of a child restraint fixing system, note the instructions, refer to page 53.

1. Hold the top of the backrest, for example the head restraint, and pull on the loop, ar row.

2. Engage the backrest in the desired position or fold it down.

Folding the backrests back up Locking the backrest When folding back, ensure that the locks

engage properly; otherwise, cargo could be catapulted forward into the passenger com partment during braking maneuvers and swerving, endangering the occupants.

No child restraint fixing systems Do not mount child restraint fixing sys

tems in the rear when the rear seat backrests are adjusted to a more vertical position; other wise, the protection provided by these systems may be reduced.

When the backrests are folded back up, they engage in the transport position. To set the desired backrest inclination or com fort position, hold the backrest, pull the loop forward, and adjust the backrest.

MINI Paceman: rear seat backrests Danger of pinching Before folding down the rear seat back

rests, ensure that path of movement of the backrests is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may result.

1. Pull on the respective loop, arrow. The backrest is unlocked.

2. Fold the backrest forward.

Folding the backrests back up Hold the top of the backrest, for example the head restraint, and fold it back.

Locking the backrest When folding back, ensure that the locks

engage properly; otherwise, cargo could be catapulted forward into the passenger com partment during braking maneuvers and swerving, endangering the occupants.

Flat loading floor Maximum load Do not exceed the maximum load of

330 lbs, 150 kg, on the loading floor; otherwise, damage may result.

Access to storage area A storage area for items like the partition net is found under the loading floor.

1. Reach into the recess, arrow 1, on the rear edge of the loading floor.

Seite 111

Interior equipment Controls

111Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

2. Lift the loading floor at the rear, arrow 1, and fold it forward, arrow 2.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Before closing the tailgate, lower the loading floor back onto the cargo area floor.

Removing The loading floor can be removed if necessary.

1. Fold up the loading floor. 2. Pull it back slightly and out of the holders. 3. Then remove it upward. The folded loading floor can be stored in the cargo area.

MINI Countryman: partition net Firmly attach the partition net Make sure that the partition net is firmly

attached; otherwise, injuries may result.

Before installing 1. Remove the pouch with the partition net

from the storage compartment under the loading floor in the cargo area.

2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un roll it, and unfold it. After use, fold and roll up the partition net in the same manner and place it in the pouch so that it can be stowed back under the cargo floor panel. Ensure that hooks and tensioning buckles do not rest on the rod elements.

3. Unfold the partition net to the point where the rod elements engage.

Installation behind the front seats

1. Take out the cargo cover if necessary. 2. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to

Enlarging the cargo area. 3. Insert the retaining pins of the partition net

all the way into the front holders in the headliner, arrow 1, and push forward.

4. Attach the hooks, arrow 2, at the bottom of the retaining straps on both sides to the eyelets on the vehicle floor.

5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this, tighten the retaining straps using the ten sioning buckles.

Removing To remove and stow the partition net, proceed in reverse order.

Seite 112

Controls Interior equipment

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

To fold up, press the release button, arrow.

MINI Countryman: multi-function hook

Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags and totes, for example, are located on the left and right sides of the cargo cover support, arrow.

Do not hang heavy items from the hooks Only hang light bags or suitable objects

from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and eva sive maneuvers. Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured.

Seite 113

Interior equipment Controls

113Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Storage compartments Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Notes No loose objects in the passenger com partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger com partment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants for in stance during braking and avoidance maneu vers.

No non-slip mats on the dashboard Do not use non-slip materials, such as

non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be damaged by the substances in the materials.

Storage compartments Interior Glove compartment, refer to page 114. Center armrest, refer to page 115. Center rail, refer to page 116. Compartments in the center console. Compartments in the doors. Pockets on the back of the front seat back

rests. Cupholder, refer to page 108. Clothes hooks, refer to page 117.

Cargo area Lashing eyes, refer to page 127. Storage compartment under the flat load

ing floor, refer to page 111. Multi-function hook on the cargo cover

support, refer to page 113.

Glove compartment Opening

Pull the handle to open the lid. The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing Fold up the cover.

Close the glove compartment again im mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.

Ventilation Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the glove compartment can be ventilated and, if the cooling function is switched on, cooled.

Seite 114

Controls Storage compartments

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Opening

Turn the switch in the direction of the arrow.

Closing Move the switch to the vertical position by turning it in the opposite direction of the arrow. Depending on the temperature setting of the air conditioning or automatic climate control, high temperatures may occur in the glove com partment.

USB interface for data transfer Updating the navigation data, refer to page 134, from the USB medium via the USB interface in the glove compartment. Observe the following when connecting: Do not use force when plugging the con

nector into the USB interface. Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB interface. Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB interface to recharge

external devices.

Center armrest The center armrest between the front seats contains a storage compartment or a cover for the snap-in adapter, refer to page 200, de pending on the equipment. The center armrest between the rear seats con tains a storage compartment.

Do not position tall accessory parts directly on the center rail of the center armrest; otherwise, they may be damaged when the center arm rest is opened or closed.

Center armrest front

Opening Press the button, arrow, and pull up the lid.

MINI Paceman: center armrest, rear

Removing The rear center armrest can be removed to en large the loading area.

1. Turn the handwheel counterclockwise all the way to open it, arrow 1.

2. Push the center armrest back slightly in the base plate, arrow 2.

3. Lift the center armrest at the front and pivot it out.

Seite 115

Storage compartments Controls

115Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Installing 1. Insert the center armrest into the rear re

cess of the base plate, arrow 1. 2. Push it back and pivot it down at the front,

arrow 2.

3. Push the center armrest forward in the base plate.

4. Tighten the handwheel by turning it clock wise.

Ensure that the center armrest engages prop erly when installed; otherwise, it could become damaged during braking maneuvers, for exam ple.

Center rail Various accessory parts can be mounted on the center rail and moved to different positions. Do not use accessory parts in the area of the handbrake; otherwise, they may become dam aged when the handbrake lever is activated.

Smartphone cradle The upper part of the smartphone cradle can be rotated by 360. When installing it at the front of the rail, ensure that it is surrounded by adequate clearance, such as toward the seat; otherwise, damage may result when it is rotated.

1. Pull up the lever 1 to unlock the holders.

2. Insert the smartphone cradle into the cen ter rail with the holders 2 first.

3. To fix, push the lever 1 downward. Ensure that the lever is properly engaged.

When connecting a smartphone to the USB au dio interface, refer to page 170, pass the con nection cable under the smartphone cradle. In addition, the connection cable can be at tached inside the rail.

1. Twist the rail segment, arrow 1, to remove it.

2. Insert the connection cable centrally into the recess, arrow 2.

3. Fix the rail segment in the rail.

Base plate Various accessory parts such as cupholders, eyeglass holders, and mobile phone cradles can be mounted on the base plate.

Inserting the base plate The lever 3 can be engaged in three positions.

Seite 116

Controls Storage compartments

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

0 Setting 1 Adjusting the position on the rail 2 Inserting the base plate

To insert, move the lever to position 2.

Adjusting the position and fixing 1. Push lever 3 into position 1. 2. Adjust the position of the base plate. 3. Push lever 3 downward into position 0.

Do not apply excessive pressure to the lever.

The base plate is fixed. Fix the base plate Fix the base plate before driving away;

otherwise, injuries may result during an acci dent.

An example: eyeglass holder Attach the eyeglass holder and adjust the posi tion.

Mounting the eyeglass holder 1. If necessary, fix the base plate, refer to Ad

justing the position and fixing. 2. Pull up lever 6 to unlock the holders.

3. First engage the eyeglass holder in the front holders 4 and then in the rear hold ers 5.

Ensure that lever 6 is across from holder 4.

Clothes hooks Clothes hooks are located on the grab handles in the rear.

Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv er's vision.

No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma neuvers.

Seite 117

Storage compartments Controls

117Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Connection for an exter nal audio device

This can be used to connect an external audio device, refer to page 169, such as a CD or MP3 player.

Seite 118

Controls Storage compartments

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Seite 119

Storage compartments Controls

119Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

DRIVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

At a glance

Controls

Driving tips

Navigation

Entertainment

Communication

Mobility

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at various engine and vehicle speeds, but do not exceed: For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode for the initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac

tion potential until after an initial breaking-in period. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and discs. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

Clutch The clutch requires an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to function at an op timal level. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be ob served if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes Ground clearance

Ensure adequate ground clearance Ensure adequate ground clearance, e.g.,

when driving into underground garages, when driving over curbs, or when driving in winter; otherwise, damage may occur to the vehicle.

Seite 122

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Closing the tailgate Drive with the tailgate closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other

wise, passengers and other road users may be endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if an accident occurs or during braking or swerv ing. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the passenger compartment.

If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with the tailgate open: Drive moderately. Close all windows and the glass sunroof. Switch off recirculated air mode and greatly

increase the blower speed.

Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle po sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri ous personal injury as well as property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve hicle

It is not recommended to use mobile phones, such as mobile phones without a direct con nection to an external aerial in the vehicle's passenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi cle electronics and mobile communication de vices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation gener

ated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth, refer to page 226.

Driving through water Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.

Using the handbrake on inclines Using the handbrake On inclines, do not hold the vehicle sta

tionary with a slipping clutch for extended pe riod; use the handbrake instead. Otherwise, the clutch will be subject to increased wear.

Support from the hill drive-off assistant, refer to page 95.

Braking safely The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces sary. The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a mini mum of steering effort.

Seite 123

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

123Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Do not let your foot rest on the brake pedal

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Objects in the area around the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again when they are returned after being re moved, such as for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Oth erwise, the brake system may overheat, result ing in a reduction in the brake system effi ciency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary. Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic transmission, refer to page 66.

Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake

system. Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Do not drive in neutral Never drive with the transmission in neu

tral, with the engine switched off or with the clutch depressed; otherwise, you will have nei ther the braking action of the engine or nor its power assistance when braking or steering.

Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina tion on the brake pads are furthered by: Low mileage. Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all. Infrequent use of the brakes. Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef fect that generally cannot be corrected.

When the vehicle is parked When using the automatic climate control, con densation water develops that exits under neath the vehicle. Therefore, traces of condensed water under the vehicle are normal. After the engine is switched off, the coolant pump may continue running for some time in the MINI Cooper S. This causes noises in the en gine compartment.

Seite 124

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Driving on poor roads Your MINI with ALL4 all-wheel drive feels com fortable on all streets and roads. It combines an all-wheel drive system with the advantages of a normal passenger car.

Do not drive on unpaved terrain Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as oth

erwise the vehicle may be damaged.

For your own safety and the safety of passen gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following points: Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before

driving; never take risks. Adjust speeds according to road conditions.

The steeper and rougher the road surface is, the lower the speed should be.

When driving on steep uphill and downhill grades: the engine oil and coolant should be filled nearly to the MAX mark.

Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta cles and drive around these where possible.

On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact between the vehicle body and the ground. The maximum ground clearance is 6 in ches/15 cm and may vary with the loaded cargo.

When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum water height of 12 in ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.

After driving through water, press on the brake pedal several times at low speeds to dry the brakes.

Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC briefly, refer to page 94.

When the wheels spin, accelerate to enable the driving stability control systems to dis tribute the drive force to the individual wheels.

After driving on poor roads Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi cle safety: Remove excessive accumulations of dirt

and mud from the vehicle body. Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels

and tires and check for damage.

Seite 125

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

125Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Loading Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

General information Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carry

ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.

No fluids in the cargo area Make sure that fluids do not leak into the

cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam aged.

Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve hicles placard:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve hicle and unstable driving situations may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas sengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transfered to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load ca pacity of your vehicle.

Load 4-seater:

Seite 126

Driving tips Loading

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

5-seater:

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not

occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as low as possible, ideally directly behind the backrests.

Cover sharp edges and corners. Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge

of the backrests. If necessary, fold down the rear backrests

to stow cargo. Use the partition net, refer to page 112, to

protect passengers. Make sure that objects cannot penetrate the partition net.

Place protective material around any sharp- edged or pointed objects that could bump

against the rear window while the vehicle is in motion.

MINI Countryman

MINI Paceman

Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area

MINI Countryman

Seite 127

Loading Driving tips

127Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI Paceman

Securing cargo Secure smaller and lighter pieces with tight

ening belts or straps. Secure larger and heavier pieces with cargo

straps. Adhere to the information included with the cargo straps.

Eight mounting eyes are available for fas tening the cargo straps. Two of them are located on the side wall of the cargo area, arrows 1, and two are lo cated on the rear wall of the cargo area, ar rows 2.

Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described

above; otherwise it may present a danger to the occupants, for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers. Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants, for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws. Do not secure cargo using the upper LATCH mounting points, refer to page 55; otherwise, these may become damaged.

Roof-mounted luggage rack Notes A special rack system is available as an optional accessory.

Attachment Follow the installation instructions for the roof- mounted luggage rack. Ensure that adequate clearance is available for the movement of the glass sunroof.

Loading Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

Distribute the roof load uniformly. The roof load should not be too large in

area. Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot

tom. Fasten the roof-mounted luggage securely,

for instance using lashing straps. Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate. Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration

and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen tly.

Rear luggage rack Notes A special rear rack is available as an optional accessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.

Seite 128

Driving tips Loading

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Follow the installation instructions for the rear rack.

Anchorage points MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

The anchorage points are under the covers in the bumper. Push out the covers on the corresponding cut outs.

Loading When loading the vehicle, ensure that the ap proved gross vehicle weight and the axle loads are not exceeded. Adhere to the weight specifi cations in the technical data.

Seite 129

Loading Driving tips

129Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Saving fuel Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular mainte nance can have an influence on fuel consump tion and on the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks after use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close both windows Open windows causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla tion pressure, refer to page 220, at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. To achieve this, maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speeds Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high en gine speeds. When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con stant speed. As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a halt in the highest applicable gear. On a downhill slope, take your foot off the ac celerator and coast in a suitable gear. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Seite 130

Driving tips Saving fuel

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Fuel savings are already achieved after the en gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.

Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function auto matically switches the engine off during a stop. If the engine is stopped and then started again, fuel consumption and emissions drop com pared to an engine that runs permanently. Stopping the engine even for just a few sec onds can result in savings. In addition, fuel consumption depends on other factors as well, such as driving style, road con ditions, maintenance, and environmental fac tors.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.

Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by the serv ice center. Please also note the MINI maintenance system, refer to page 237.

Seite 131

Saving fuel Driving tips

131Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

FOLLOW ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

At a glance

Controls

Driving tips

Navigation

Entertainment

Communication

Mobility

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Navigation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

General information The navigation system can determine the pre cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination.

Entries in stationary vehicle Enter data only when the vehicle is sta

tionary, and always give priority to the applica ble traffic regulations in the event of any con tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.

Opening the navigation system 1. "Navigation"

During destination guidance, the arrow or map view appears on the Control Display.

Navigation data Information on navigation data 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Navigation system version"

Information is displayed on the data ver sion.

Updating the navigation data

General information Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated. Current navigation data and the authorization code are available from your service center. Depending on the data volume, a data up

date may take several hours. Update during the trip to preserve battery. The status of the update can be viewed. The data are stored in the vehicle. After the updating process is complete, the

system restarts. Remove the medium with the navigation

data after the update.

Performing the update 1. Depending on the equipment: insert the

USB device with the navigation data into the USB interface in the glove compartment or in the USB audio interface.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play.

3. Enter the authorization code of the USB de vice with the navigation data.

4. Drive off. The update starts after the authorization code is entered.

Seite 134

Navigation Navigation system

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

When the update is completed, the system re starts.

Seite 135

Navigation system Navigation

135Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Destination entry Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

At a glance In entering your destination, it is possible to se lect from the following options: Enter the destination manually, see below. Select the destination from the address

book, refer to page 138. Last destinations, refer to page 139. Special destinations, refer to page 140. Destination entry via map, refer to

page 141. Using the home address as the destination,

refer to page 139. Destination entry by voice, refer to

page 142.

Manual destination en try General information The system supports you in entering street names and house numbers by automatically completing the entry and providing entry com parisons, refer to page 25. Stored town/city and street names can be called up quickly.

If the existing entries should not be changed, the entries for the state/province and town/city can be skipped.

Destination guidance is started to the town/ city center if no street is entered.

Entering a state/province 1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address"

3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province.

Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city.

2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is narrowed down further with each entry.

3. Move the MINI joystick to the right. 4. Select the name of the town/city from the

list.

Seite 136

Navigation Destination entry

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names. 2. Highlight the town/city. 3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis

played town/city. 2. Select the symbol. 3. Select the digits individually. 4. Change to the list of postal codes and

towns/cities. 5. Highlight the entry. 6. Selecting an entry.

The associated destination town/city is dis played.

Entering a street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter a street and intersection in the same

way as you would enter a town/city. If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names. 2. Highlight the street. 3. Select the street.

Alternative: enter the street address and house number 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter the street as you would the town/city. 3. "House number" 4. Select the numbers. 5. Change to the list of house numbers. 6. Select a house number or range of house

numbers.

Street does not exist in the destination city/town The desired street does not exist in the speci fied city/town because it belongs to another part of the city/town.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Enter address" 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 4. Change to the list of street names. 5. Select "In" with the state/province currently

displayed. All streets of the selected state/province are offered. The associated town/city is dis played after the street name.

6. Select the letters. 7. Change to the list of street names. 8. Highlight the street. 9. Select the street.

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination" 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination"

Seite 137

Destination entry Navigation

137Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 144.

Address book Create contacts, refer to page 187.

Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book"

Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as des tinations in the contacts. If the contacts with addresses from the mo bile phone are not displayed, they first need to be checked as destinations, refer to page 189.

3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with "A-Z search".

4. "Business address" or "Home address"

Storing the destination in the address book After entering the destination, store the desti nation in the address book.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. Open "Options". 5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

6. Select an existing contact, if available. 7. "Business address" or "Home address" 8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First

name". 9. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad dress book.

1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options".

Seite 138

Navigation Destination entry

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact"

4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex isting contact from the list. Select the type of address and enter the first and last name.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 3. Highlight the entry. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"

Using the home address as the destination The home address must be stored. Specify the home address, refer to page 188.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book"

3. "Home"

4. "Start guidance"

Last destinations At a glance The destinations previously entered are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Calling up the last destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations"

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Select the destination. 4. "Start guidance"

Seite 139

Destination entry Navigation

139Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Editing the destination Destinations can be edited, for example to change the house number of an existing entry.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation" 2. "Last destinations" 3. Highlight the destination. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last

destinations"

Special destinations General information Even with the latest navigation data, informa tion on individual special destinations may have changed; for example, gas stations might not be in operation.

Opening the search for special destinations Selection of special destinations, such as hotels or tourist attractions.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of Interest" 3. Select the search function.

A-Z search 1. "A-Z search" 2. "Town/City" 3. Select or enter the town/city. 4. "Category"

5. Select the category. 6. "Category details"

For some special destinations, it may be possible to select multiple category details. Move the MINI joystick to the left to leave the category details.

7. "Keyword" 8. Enter the keyword.

A list of the special destinations is dis played.

9. Select a special destination. Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. If a phone number is available, a connec tion can be established if necessary.

10. Select the symbol. 11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 144.

Category search 1. "Category search" 2. "Search destination" 3. Select or enter the town/city. 4. "Category" 5. Select the category. 6. "Category details"

For some special destinations, it may be possible to select multiple category details. Move the MINI joystick to the left to leave the category details.

7. "Start search" A list of the special destinations is dis played.

8. Select a special destination. Details are displayed. If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages.

Seite 140

Navigation Destination entry

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

If a phone number is available, a connec tion can be established if necessary.

9. Select the symbol. 10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 144.

Position of special destinations When entering the search location, various op tions can be selected. "At current location" "At destination" "At different location" If destination guidance is active: "Along

route"

Starting the search for special destinations 1. "Start search" 2. A list of the special destinations is dis

played. "At current location"

The special destinations are listed ac cording to their distance and are dis played with a directional arrow pointing to the destination.

"At destination", "At different location", "Along route" Special destinations are listed according to their distance from the location where the search is being performed.

Destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as sym bols. The display depends on the map scale and the category.

3. Highlight the special destination. 4. Select a special destination. 5. Select the symbol. 6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination" The direct distance to destination is dis played.

Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map view:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display Points of Interest"

5. Select the setting.

Destination entry by map General information If only the location of the destination town/city or street is known, the destination can be en tered using the map.

Seite 141

Destination entry Navigation

141Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Selecting the destination 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

The current position of the vehicle is dis played on the map.

3. "Interactive map"

4. Select the destination with crosshairs. To change the scale: turn the MINI joy

stick. To shift the map: move the MINI joy

stick in the required direction. To shift the map diagonally: move the

MINI joystick in the required direction and turn the MINI joystick.

5. Press the MINI joystick to display additional menu items. Select the symbol: "Start guidance"

or "Add as another destination". "Find points of interest": the search for

special destinations is started.

Specifying the street If the system does not recognize the street, one of the following pieces of information is dis played: A street name in the vicinity. The coordinates of the destination.

Additional functions On the interactive map, the scale can be ad justed and the map section can be shifted.

Pressing the MINI joysticks makes additional functions available:

Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

"Exit interactive map": return to the map view.

Map view "Display destination": the map section

around the destination is displayed. "Display current location": the map section

around your current location is displayed. "Find points of interest": the search for spe

cial destinations is started.

Destination entry by voice General information Instructions for voice activation system, re

fer to page 26. When making a destination entry by voice,

you can change between voice activation and the onboard monitor.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands.

Saying the entries Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in

tersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the language of the system, refer to page 73.

Seite 142

Navigation Destination entry

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Example: to enter a town/city in a US states as a whole word, the language of the sys tem must be English.

Spell the entry if the spoken language and the language of the system differ.

Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.

The methods of entry depend on the navi gation data in use and the country and lan guage settings.

Entering a town/city separately The town/city can be said as a complete word.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. City or Spell city 3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the

town/city. 4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at

least the first three letters. 5. Select a location:

Select a recommended town/city: Yes. Select a different town/city: New

entry. Select an entry: Entry ..., for instance,

entry 2. Spell an entry: Spell city.

6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name: Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a list and displayed as one location followed by an ellipsis.

1. Select an entry: Yes or Entry ..., e. g., En try 2.

2. Select the desired town/city. The town/city can also be selected from the list on the onboard monitor:

Turn the MINI joystick until the destination town/city is selected and press the MINI joystick.

Entering a street or intersection separately Enter a street and intersection in the same way as you would enter a town/city.

Entering a house number separately Depending on the data in the navigation sys tem, house numbers up to number 2,000 can be entered.

1. House number 2. Say the house number. 3. Yes to confirm the house number. 4. Accept destination

Starting destination guidance Start guidance

Adding further intermediate destinations Add as another destination Further intermediate destinations can be added.

Storing a destination The destination is automatically added to the list of last destinations.

Planning a trip with in termediate destinations New trip Various intermediate destinations can be en tered for a trip. The trip destination needs to be entered first, destination entry, refer to page 136.

Seite 143

Destination entry Navigation

143Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip.

1. "Navigation" 2. Select the type of destination entry and en

ter the intermediate destination.

3. "Add as another destination"

4. Select the position where the intermediate destination is to be inserted.

Starting the trip After all intermediate destinations have been entered: "Start guidance"

Seite 144

Navigation Destination entry

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Destination guidance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Make a destination entry, refer to

page 136. 3. "Accept destination" 4. "Start guidance" The route is shown on the Control Display. The distance to the destination/intermediate destination and the estimated time of arrival are displayed in the map view. The arrow view may appear on the Control Dis play.

Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed. "Resume guidance"

Route criteria General information The route calculated can be influenced by

selecting certain criteria. The route criteria can be changed when the

destination is entered and during destina tion guidance.

Road types are part of the navigation data and are taken into consideration when planning a route, e.g., avoid highways.

The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on per sonal experience.

The settings are stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins, refer to page 151.

Changing the route criteria 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Route preference" 4. Select the criterion:

"Fast route": time-optimized route, being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads.

"Efficient route": optimized combi nation of the fastest and shortest route.

Seite 145

Destination guidance Navigation

145Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

"Short route": short distance, irre spective of how fast or slow progress will be.

"Alternative routes": if available, alter native routes are suggested during ac tive destination guidance.

5. Select additional criteria for the route, if necessary. Where possible, the selected cri teria are avoided on the route. "Avoid highways": highways are

avoided wherever possible. "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are

avoided wherever possible. "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided

where possible.

Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance: Arrow view. List of route sections. Map view, refer to page 148.

Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance: Large arrow: indicates the current direction

of travel. Street name of the road currently being

driven on.

Small arrow: indicates the next change in direction.

Intersection view. Lane information. Traffic bulletins. Distance to the next change in direction. Street name at the next change in direc

tion.

Lane information On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes are marked in the arrow view by a triangle. Solid triangle: best lane. Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an

other lane change may be needed shortly.

Displaying a list of route sections When destination guidance is active, a list of the route sections can be displayed. The driving distance and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information"

3. Highlight a route section.

Bypassing a section of the route Calculate a new route for a route section.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information"

Seite 146

Navigation Destination guidance

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. "New route for"

4. Turn the MINI joystick. Enter the number of kilometers within which you would like to return to the original route.

5. Press the MINI joystick.

Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be by passed:

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "New route for:" 4. "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommenda tion The remaining range is calculated and gas sta tions along the route are displayed if needed. Even with the latest navigation data, informa tion on individual special destinations may have changed; for example, gas stations might not be in operation.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information" 3. "Recommended refuel"

A list of the gas stations is displayed. 4. Highlight a gas station. 5. Select the gas station.

6. Select the symbol. 7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to

the selected gas station is started. "Add as another destination": the gas sta tion is added to the route.

Destination guidance through voice instruc tions Switching spoken instructions on/off The spoken instructions can be switched on or off during destination guidance. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Select the symbol.

Symbol Function

The spoken instructions are switched on.

Spoken instructions are switched off.

Repeating a spoken instruction 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Highlight the symbol. 4. Press the MINI joystick twice.

Volume of spoken instructions Turn the volume knob while giving an instruc tion until the desired volume is set.

Seite 147

Destination guidance Navigation

147Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Map view Selecting the map view 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map"

At a glance

1 Function bar 2 Route section with traffic obstruction 3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction 4 Planned route 5 Current location 6 Upper status field 7 Lower status field

Lines in the map Streets and routes are displayed in different colors and styles depending on their classifica

tion. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry connections. Country borders are indicated by thin lines.

Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route indicate route sections with traffic obstructions, de pending on the map scale. The direction of the triangles indicates the direction of the obstruc tion. The traffic signs indicate the significance of the obstruction. Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the

planned route or direction. Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not

affect the planned route or direction. Traffic bulletins, refer to page 149.

Planned route After destination guidance is started, the plan ned route is displayed on the map.

Status fields To show/hide: press the MINI joystick. Upper status field: time, telephone, and en

tertainment details. Lower status field: symbol for active desti

nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins, time of arrival, and distance to destination.

Function bar The following functions are available in the function bar: Symbol Function

Start/end destination guidance.

Switch spoken instructions on/ off.

Change the route criteria.

Search for a special destina tion.

Seite 148

Navigation Destination guidance

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Symbol Function

Display traffic bulletins.

Open the interactive map.

Adjust the map views.

Adjust the arrow view.

Change the scale.

Changing the map section "Interactive map"

To shift the map: move the MINI joystick in the required direction.

To shift the map diagonally: move the MINI joystick in the required direction and turn the MINI joystick.

Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol. 2. To change the scale: turn the MINI joystick.

Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north, turn the MINI joy stick in any direction until the AUTO is dis played for the scale. The entire route between the current location and the destination is dis played on the map.

Settings for the map view The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. To set the map view:

"Day/night mode" Select and create the necessary settings depending on the light conditions.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the setting is disregarded.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

Arrow view When destination guidance is activated, the ar row view can additionally be displayed in the map view on the right side of the display.

1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Arrow display on map"

The arrow view is shown on the map.

Traffic bulletins At a glance Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta

tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa tion of a traffic information service. Infor mation on traffic obstructions and hazards is updated continuously.

The traffic bulletins are indicated on the map by symbols.

The symbol in the function bar of the map view turns red if there are traffic bulletins that affect the calculated route.

Seite 149

Destination guidance Navigation

149Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Real Time Traffic Information End-User Provisions Certain MINI models equipped with navigation have the capability to display real-time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply: An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End- User is in material breach of the terms and con ditions contained herein. A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (Total Traffic Net work) holds the rights to the traffic incident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic incident data. You agree to in demnify, defend and hold harmless MINI of North America, LLC. (MINI NA) and Total Traf fic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unau thorized or unlawful activities by you in con nection herewith. B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, MINI NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed. C. The licensed material is provided to license as is, and where is. Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit ted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material (including, without limitation, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interrup tion or that the traffic data will be accurate), ex press, implied or statutory, including, without

limitation, the implied warranties of merchant ability, non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of deal ing or usage of trade. D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or MINI NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental damages (including, without limitation, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relat ing to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or MINI NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse quential damages, so those particular limita tions may not apply to you.

Switching the reception on/off 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Receive Traffic Info"

Open the traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info"

First, traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis tance from the current position of the vehi cle.

4. Select a traffic bulletin. "More information": display additional

information. 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin

if required.

Traffic bulletins on the map "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:

Seite 150

Navigation Destination guidance

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The Control Display changes to a black and white display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre garded in this setting. Symbols and special des tinations are not displayed.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the lo cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis played.

Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc tion's length, direction, and impact are dis played in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. Red: traffic congestion. Orange: stop-and-go traffic. Yellow: heavy traffic. Green: clear roads. Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road

construction. The displayed information depends on the par ticular traffic information service.

Filtering traffic bulletins You can set which traffic bulletins appear on the map.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options".

4. "Traffic Info categories" 5. Select the desired category.

Traffic bulletins of the selected category are displayed on the map. Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the

route are always shown. For your own safety, traffic bulletins that

notify you of potentially dangerous situa tions cannot be hidden.

Destination guidance with traffic bulletins

General information Detour suggestions from the navigation system can be manually accepted when using semi-dy namic destination guidance. When using dy namic destination guidance, they are automati cally accepted for route guidance.

Semi-dynamic destination guidance When traffic bulletin reception is switched on, semi-dynamic destination guidance is active. The destination guidance system takes the available traffic bulletins into account. A mes sage is displayed depending on the route, the traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes. If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic obstructions. In addition, distance and time dif ferences between the original route and the detour are displayed.

Accepting the detour "Detour"

Seite 151

Destination guidance Navigation

151Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on the road, a message is displayed without a de tour suggestion. Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes sages are called up in the list.

1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info" 4. "Detour information" 5. "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. The system does not point out traffic ob

structions along the original route. Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on

the map. Depending on road type and the kind and

extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu lated route may lead through the traffic ob struction.

Dangerous situations are displayed regard less of the setting.

Activating dynamic destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Dynamic guidance"

Seite 152

Navigation Destination guidance

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

What to do if... Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

What to do if... The current transmission position cannot be

displayed? The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region, is in a poor reception area, or the system is currently determining the posi tion. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky.

The destination without street information is not used for route guidance? When city has been input, no downtown can be determined. Input any street in the selected city and start destination guid ance.

The destination is not used for route guid ance? The destination data are not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

Letters for destination input cannot be se lected? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a goal that is as close as possible to the original.

Is the map displayed in shades of gray? "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:

The Control Display changes to a black and white display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec tions? The area has not yet been fully recorded, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calcu late a new route suggestion.

Does the navigation system fail to react to entries? If the battery was disconnected, it takes up to 10 minutes for the system to becoming functional again.

Seite 153

What to do if... Navigation

153Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

ROCK ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

At a glance

Controls

Driving tips

Navigation

Entertainment

Communication

Mobility

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Tone Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

General information The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, and fader "Treble": treble adjustment. "Bass": depth adjustment. "Balance": left/right volume distribution. "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone settings.

4. To set: turn the MINI joystick. 5. To save: press the MINI joystick.

Volume "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume

control. "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared

to the entertainment sound output. "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the

safety belt reminder, compared to the en tertainment sound output.

Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package "Microphone": volume of the microphone

during a phone call. "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers

during a phone call. The following volumes are only stored for the respective paired telephone: "Microphone", "Loudspeak.".

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings"

Seite 156

Entertainment Tone

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To set: turn the MINI joystick. 6. To save: press the MINI joystick.

Resetting the tone set tings All tone settings can be reset to the default set ting.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset"

Seite 157

Tone Entertainment

157Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Radio Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Controls

1 CD drive 2 Changing the waveband 3 Changing the audio source 4 Volume, on/off 5 Change station/track 6 Ejecting the CD

Sound output Switching on/off

When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

This symbol at the upper edge of the Con trol Display indicates that the sound is switched off.

AM/FM station Selecting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Select the desired station.

Seite 158

Entertainment Radio

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

All saved stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing the station Turn and press the MINI joystick. or

Press the button or Press the buttons on the steering wheel.

Storing a station 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Highlight the desired station.

4. Press the MINI joystick. 5. Select the desired memory location. Press and hold the MINI joystick to store a sta tion that is displayed in the station list but is not being played. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. "Manual" 4. To select a frequency: turn the MINI joy

stick.

To save a station: press and hold the MINI joystick.

RDS RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave band.

Switching the RDS on/off 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

HD Radio reception Many stations broadcast both analog and digi tal signals. License conditions HD Radio Technology manufactured under li cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Seite 159

Radio Entertainment

159Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" 3. Open "Options". 4. "HD Radio Reception" The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital. When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it may take several seconds for the station to be played back in digital quality. Note on HD stations whose station name ends in ...HD or HD1: In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception. Note on HD multicast stations whose station name ends in ...HD2, ...HD3, ...: In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the audible signal may be interrupted for several seconds. This is reception related.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired station. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation This symbol indicates that a main station

also broadcasts additional substations. The sta tion name of the main station ends in HD1. Sta tion names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Press the controller. 3. Select the substation. When reception is poor, the substation is muted.

Satellite radio General information The channels are offered in predefined pack ages. The packages must be enabled by tele phone.

Navigation bar overview

Symbol Function

Change the list view.

Select the category.

Direct channel entry

Timeshift

Open the My Favorites category/ open a favorite.

Manage the favorites.

Traffic Jump

Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Enabling channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio"

Seite 160

Entertainment Radio

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. "Category"

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels category. 5. Select the desired channel.

The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Select the phone number to have the chan nel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Manage subscription"

5. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the channels.

Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via the onboard monitor 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate

gory. 4. Select the desired channel.

Via the buttons in the area of the CD player

Press the button. The next channel is selected.

Via direct channel entry 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Set channel" 4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired

channel is reached and press the MINI joy stick.

Seite 161

Radio Entertainment

161Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Storing a channel 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the MINI joystick again. 6. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm the

highlighted channel.

7. Select the desired memory location. The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing the list view The list view changes every time the first sym bol on the navigation bar is pressed. Information on the channel is displayed. Symbol Meaning

Channel name

Artist

Track

Selecting a category 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category" 4. Select the desired category.

Timeshift Approx. one hour of the program being broad cast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must be available. The stored audio track can be played with a de lay following the live broadcast. When the buf fer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buffer is cleared when a new channel is se lected.

Opening the timeshift function 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift"

The red arrow shows the current playback position.

The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar.

For live transmissions "live".

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast

Playback/pause

Next track

Previous track

Fast forward

Seite 162

Entertainment Radio

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Symbol Function

Reverse

Automatic timeshift deactivated/ activated

Automatic timeshift When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of: Incoming and outgoing telephone calls. Activation of the voice activation system. Muting. The audio playback then continues with a time delay.

Activating 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift"

Deactivating "Automatic time shift"

Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, league, and team.

Storing the artist, track, or game It is only possible to store favorites that are cur rently being broadcast. The channel informa tion must be available.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de

sired category. 4. Select the desired channel. 5. Press the MINI joystick again. 6. Select the artist, track, or game.

Storing the league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list.

1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Manage favorites" 4. "Add sports information"

5. Select the league. 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.

Opening the favorites If an activated favorite is played back, the fol lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec onds "Favorite alert!".

"Favorites" Select the symbol while the message is shown.

The displayed favorite is played. If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All favorites cur rently being broadcast can be selected from a list.

Seite 163

Radio Entertainment

163Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Managing the favorites

Activating/deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor

ites. The setting is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Highlight the desired favorite. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Set jump" 5. Select the desired region. The region is stored for the remote control cur rently in use.

Activating/deactivating the jump 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Jump to:" Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available. A new panel opens. Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broad cast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The up date takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

Notes Reception may not be available in some sit

uations, such as under certain environmen tal or topographic conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this.

The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages; next to tall build ings; or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Stored stations General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Calling up a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station.

Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio" 2. "Presets"

Seite 164

Entertainment Radio

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location. The list of stored stations is stored for the re mote control currently in use.

Deleting a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete entry"

Seite 165

Radio Entertainment

165Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

CD/multimedia Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Sound output Switching on/off

When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio.

Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio.

This symbol at the upper edge of the Con trol Display indicates that the sound is switched off.

CD player Playback

Inserting the CD Insert the CD with the printed side facing up. Playback begins automatically. Reading can take a few minutes with com pressed audio files.

Starting playback A CD is contained in the CD player.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD" 3. Select the desired track. Press the MINI joy

stick to start playback.

Playable formats CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA. Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC.

Ejecting the CD

Press the button on the CD player. The CD emerges slightly from the drive.

Seite 166

Entertainment CD/multimedia

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the button

Press the button for the appropri ate direction as often as necessary until the de sired track is played back.

Selecting the track on the onboard monitor

Audio CDs

Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs with compressed audio files Depending on the data, some letters and num bers of the CD may not be displayed correctly.

1. Select the directory if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the MINI joystick to the left.

2. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Displaying information on the track

If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically: Artist. Album track. Number of tracks on the CD. File name of track.

Random playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD" 3. Select the desired CD.

Seite 167

CD/multimedia Entertainment

167Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

4. Open "Options". 5. "Random"

To switch off random playback: press the MINI joystick.

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

Automatic repeat The selected track, directories, or CDs are re peated automatically.

Notes

CD player Do not remove the cover The CD players are officially designated

Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye dam age can result.

CDs Using CDs Do not use self-recorded CDs with la

bels applied, as these can become detached during playback due to heat buildup and can cause irrepara ble damage to the device.

Only use round CDs with a standard diame ter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam and no lon ger eject.

General malfunctions The CD players have been optimized for

performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa tion on the CD or the laser's scan lens, and tem porarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with particular CDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs, this can be due to one of the following causes:

Self-recorded CDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-

recorded CDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the blank CD.

Only label CDs on the upper side with a pen intended for this purpose.

Damage Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture. Store CDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs to temperatures over

50 /122 , high humidity, or direct sun light.

CDs with copy protection CDs are often provided with a copy protection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean

Seite 168

Entertainment CD/multimedia

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

that some CDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered US patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Media protected by this product - unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - may only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited.

External devices At a glance Various external devices can be connected with the vehicle. Depending on how the device is connected to the vehicle, it may be possible to operate it using the MINI joystick. Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface

Music interface for smartphones

Bluetooth audio

AUX-IN port

At a glance For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3

player. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Recommendation: use medium tone and volume settings on the audio device. The tone depends on the quality of the audio files.

Connecting The AUX-IN port is in the center console. Connect the headphone connec tor or line-out connector of the device to the AUX-IN port.

Ensure that the connector is inserted all the way into the AUX-IN port.

Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. If necessary, "External devices"

4. "AUX front" Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. If necessary, "External devices" 3. "AUX front"

Seite 169

CD/multimedia Entertainment

169Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

4. "Volume"

5. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired vol ume is set and press the MINI joystick.

USB audio interface/music interface for smartphones

At a glance It is possible to connect external audio devices. They are operated via the onboard monitor. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeak ers.

Connectors for external devices Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.

Connection via snap-in adapter, when equipped with the music interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or mobile phones. Playback is only possible if no audio device is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.

Due to the large number of different audio de vices available on the market, it cannot be en sured that every audio device/mobile phone is operable on the vehicle. Ask your service center about suitable audio devices/mobile phones.

Audio files Standard audio files can be played back: MP3.

WMA. WAV (PCM). AAC, M4A. Without the voice activation system: play

back lists: M3U With the voice activation system: playback

lists: M3U, WPL, PLS

Video files Standard video files can be played back with a compatible Apple device: MPEG4 H.264

File system Standard file systems for USB devices are sup ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.

Connecting The USB audio interface is in the center console.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB audio interface To connect the iPod, use the special cable adapter for the Apple iPod. Additional informa tion can be obtained from the service center or on the Internet: www.mini.com/connectivity. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone with the AUX- IN port and USB interface. The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup ported by the USB audio interface.

Connection of a USB device via the USB audio interface Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro tect the USB audio interface and the USB device against physical damage. Connect the USB device to the USB interface.

Seite 170

Entertainment CD/multimedia

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

After connecting for the first time Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type of music, as well as playback lists are transmitted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks. During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for approx. 26,000 tracks can be stored in the ve hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 26,000 tracks are stored, information on existing tracks may be deleted.

Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man agement (DRM) cannot be played.

Audio playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. The playback starts with the first track. The CD cover belonging to the track may ap pear on the Control Display after several sec onds.

Track search Selection is possible via: Playback lists. Information: type of music, artist, and, if

available, composer, album, track. Additionally for USB devices: file directory,

composer. Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

4. "Search" 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or

"Artist". All entries are displayed in a list. Open "A-Z search" and input the de

sired entry. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered, all results that contain that se quence are displayed.

Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain ar tist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Play"

Restarting a track search "New search"

Seite 171

CD/multimedia Entertainment

171Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Playback lists Calling up playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Playlists"

Current playback List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Current playback"

Random playback The current list of tracks is played back in ran dom order.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the steering wheel or on the CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

Video playback

At a glance Video playback is only possible with a compati ble iPod/iPhone. Connect using a video-capable adapter cable or, if applicable, a snap-in adapter.

Playback The video image on the Control Display is dis played while the vehicle is stationary; in some

countries, the handbrake must be set or P must be engaged.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Video"

5. Select the desired file. Select the category in the file directory.

6. Press the MINI joystick. Playback of the selected video file starts.

Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme en vironmental conditions, such as very high tem peratures; refer to the audio device operating instructions. Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the files may not play back correctly in each case. Audio and video playback from the snap-in adapter is only possible if no cable is connected to the AV-IN port.

Seite 172

Entertainment CD/multimedia

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Information on connection The connected audio device is supplied

with a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. Therefore, do not addition ally connect the device to a socket in the vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com promised.

Do not use force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface.

Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

Do not connect USB hard drives. Do not use the USB audio interface to re

charge external devices.

Bluetooth audio

At a glance Music files on external devices such as au

dio devices or mobile phones can be played back via Bluetooth. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 192.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

The sound is output on the vehicle loud speakers.

The volume of the sound output is depend ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device.

Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.

Requirements The device is suitable. Information under

www.mini.com/connectivity. The device is ready for operation. The ignition is switched on. Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer

to page 191, and on the device. Bluetooth presettings must be made on the

device, such as for a connection without

confirmation or visibility; refer to the device operating instructions.

A number with at least four and a maxi mum of 16 digits is defined as the Blue tooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.

Pairing and connecting Pairing a device To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

5. Perform additional steps on the device, re fer to the device operating instructions: for instance, search for or connect the Blue tooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display.

6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device display. You are prompted by the onboard monitor or device to enter the same Bluetooth pass key.

7. Enter the passkey and confirm. or

Seite 173

CD/multimedia Entertainment

173Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Compare the control number on the vehicle display with the control number on the mo bile phone display. Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the vehicle. "OK"

8. Select the desired functions with which the device is to be connected, for instance "Audio".

9. "OK" If pairing was successful, the device is displayed as connected. White symbol : the device is active as an au dio source. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re fer to page 175.

Connecting a specific device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source. Connecting is not possible when data is ex changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth.

Requirements If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devi ces.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio".

4. Select the desired device from the list of paired devices.

5. Open "Options". 6. "Configure phone" 7. Activate "Audio". 8. "OK"

Connecting the device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Select the desired device from the list of

paired devices.

White symbol : the device is active as an au dio source.

Playback

General information The display of music track information de

pends on the device. Operation can takes place on the device or

onboard monitor. Playback is interrupted when data is ex

changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth.

Starting playback 1. Connect the device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. "External devices"

Seite 174

Entertainment CD/multimedia

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

4. Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec essary.

Playback menu Depending on the particular device, some of the functions may not be available. Symbol Function

Next track Fast forward: press and hold the sym bol.

Previous music track Reverse: press and hold the symbol.

Track search Music track search is possible depending on the device.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Search device content" 5. "A-Z search" 6. Select the desired entry or directory.

Playback mode Depending on the device, different programs for playing back music files might be available.

1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the symbol.

4. Open "Options". 5. Open "Select player". 6. Select the desired channel.

Disconnecting the audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. Highlight the desired device. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone" 6. "Audio" 7. "OK" In the case of a mobile phone, only the audio connection is disconnected. All other connec tions are retained.

Unpairing a device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth audio". 4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. 5. Open "Options". 6. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable devices can be found at www.mini.com/connectivity. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 190. The device is not supported by the vehicle. Perform a software update, refer to

page 176, if needed.

Seite 175

CD/multimedia Entertainment

175Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The device could not be paired or connected. Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device

and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via the onboard monitor.

A multi-character passkey may be needed. Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter

the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure. Are too many Bluetooth devices connected

to the device or vehicle? Delete connec tions with other devices if necessary.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi ble that only one device can be connected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and pair and connect only one device.

The device no longer reacts? Switch the de vice off and on again.

Repeat the pairing procedure. Music cannot be played back. Start the program for playing back music

data on the device and select a track on the device if necessary.

Switch the radio on and off again. Music files can only be played back softly. Adjust the volume settings on the device. Videos can only be played back without audio or with delayed audio. Check the compatibility of the devices. In

formation under www.mini.com/connectiv ity.

Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed or by other messages on the device. Switch off the button tones and other signal

tones on the device.

Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati cally. Switch the radio on and off again. Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also connected via the music interface for smart phones in the snap-in adapter. Disconnect one of the two connections; for

example, disconnect the audio connection, refer to page 175, and restart playback.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Software Update The vehicle supports various external devices depending on the current software version. With a software update, the vehicle can support new mobile phones or new external device, for example. Software updates and related current informa tion is available at www.mini.com/connectivity.

Displaying the current version The currently installed software is displayed.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Show current version"

Updating the software The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary.

1. Store the file for the software-update in the main director of a USB flash drive.

2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au dio interface in the center console. An up date via the USB interface in the glove com partment is not possible.

3. "Settings" 4. "Software update"

Seite 176

Entertainment CD/multimedia

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

5. "Update software"

6. "Start update" 7. "OK" All listed software updates are installed.

Restoring the previous version The software version prior to the last software update can be restored. The previous version can only be restored when the vehicle is stationary.

1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Restore previous version" 4. "OK" Double-click. All listed software updates are removed.

Note While the software is being updated or a previ ous version is being restored, MINI Connected, Office functions, and the connected devices are temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes for the functions to become available again.

Seite 177

CD/multimedia Entertainment

177Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

CONNECT ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

At a glance

Controls

Driving tips

Navigation

Entertainment

Communication

Mobility

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Bluetooth hands-free system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

At a glance The concept Mobile phones can be connected with the vehi cle via Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG, Inc. After these devices are paired once, they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle and can then be operated via the onboard monitor, the buttons on the steering wheel, and voice activation. Up to four external devices can be paired. Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider.

Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not ob serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve hicle occupants and other road users.

Approved mobile phones Details on which mobile phones are supported by the hands-free system can be obtained at www.mini.com/connectivity.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation package. The software ver sion of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth info" 4. "Display system information" These approved mobile phones with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions. Do not operate a mobile phone that is con nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed. When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, note the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone Requirements The mobile phone is suitable, refer to

page 180. The mobile phone is ready for operation. Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone.

Seite 180

Communication Bluetooth hands-free system

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Bluetooth presettings may need to be made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con nection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating in structions.

Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. A number with at least four and a maxi

mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue tooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.

Compare the control number on the Control Display with the control number on the mo bile phone display. Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the vehicle.

The radio ready state is switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth"

Pairing and connecting a mobile phone Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle's occupants and to other road users, only

pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta tionary.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

4. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions: for instance, search for or con nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

6. You are prompted by the onboard monitor or mobile phone to enter the same Blue tooth passkey. Enter the passkey and con firm. or Compare the control number on the vehicle display with the control number on the mo bile phone display. Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the vehicle.

Seite 181

Bluetooth hands-free system Communication

181Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

"OK"

7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.

8. "OK" 9. Move the MINI joystick to the left. If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re fer to page 182.

Following the initial pairing The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detection, depending on the mobile phone.

Four mobile phones can be paired. Specific settings may be necessary in some

mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se cure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Connecting a particular mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired mobile phones are listed.

3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con nected.

Unpairing the mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired mobile phones are listed. 3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be

unpaired. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 180. The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected. Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone.

Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via the onboard monitor.

Seite 182

Communication Bluetooth hands-free system

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

A multi-character passkey may be needed. Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter

the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure. Are too many Bluetooth devices connected

to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con nections with other devices if necessary.

The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life. Charge the mobile phone via the charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi ble that only one mobile phone can be con nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and connect only one mobile phone.

The mobile phone no longer reacts. Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Is the ambient temperature too high or

low? Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme environmental conditions.

No phone book entries or only some phone book entries are displayed, or they are incom plete. Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete. It is possible that only the phone book en

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

Is the data volume of the contact too large, e. g., due to stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume of the con tact.

The phone connection quality is poor. The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.

Place the mobile phone in the area of the center console.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, con tact Customer Relations or the service center.

Controls Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is se lected. The setting is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Other wise, only the phone number is displayed. If more than one phone number is assigned to a contact, only the name of the contact is dis played.

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

or "Accept"

Seite 183

Bluetooth hands-free system Communication

183Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Rejecting a call "Reject"

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

or

1. "Telephone" 2. "End call"

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number 1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number"

3. Select the digits individually. 4. Select the symbol.

The phone number can also be entered by voice.

Calls with multiple parties

General information You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly. If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal is sounded.

"Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold"

Seite 184

Communication Bluetooth hands-free system

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Return" The call on hold is resumed.

Switching between two calls, hold call Active call: highlighted. Call on hold identified by: "on hold...".

Select the symbol to change to the call on hold.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls. 2. "Conference call"

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac cess to network services or for controlling devi

ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Telephone" 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial

number". 3. "Keypad dialing"

4. Enter the DTMF code on the onboard moni tor.

DTMF suffix dialing is not possible during con ference calls.

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book" A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Seite 185

Bluetooth hands-free system Communication

185Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Calling a contact

Symbol Meaning

Contact with one stored phone num ber.

Contact with more than one stored phone number.

Call not possible; mobile phone with out reception or network.

For contacts with one stored phone number: select the required contact. The connection is being established. For contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the required contact and the phone number. The connection is being estab lished.

Editing a contact Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a contact is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle. The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis played. The sorting order of the phone num bers depends on the particular mobile phone.

Dialing a number on the onboard monitor 1. "Telephone" 2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry and the phone number if necessary.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your partic ular mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"

Received calls

Displaying calls The list of received calls on the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle, depending on the particular mobile phone. It is possible that only

Seite 186

Communication Bluetooth hands-free system

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

those calls are displayed that were received in the vehicle. The 20 telephone calls that were last received are displayed. The sorting order and display of the phone numbers depends on the particular mobile phone.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list Selecting an entry. The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your partic ular mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"

Hands-free system

General information Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on. Depending on the mobile phone, the system automatically switches to the hands-free sys tem. If the system does not switch over automati cally, follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operating instructions.

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone. Follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operat ing instructions.

Contacts General information Contacts can be created and edited and the ad dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav igation.

Seite 187

Bluetooth hands-free system Communication

187Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

New contact 1. "Contacts" 2. "New contact"

3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ ous entries: "Delete input fields"

4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

5. Enter the text, refer to page 24. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system: enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the ve hicle can be entered. This ensures that des tination guidance is possible for all ad dresses.

6. If necessary, "Store". 7. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts

General information List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.

Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts" 2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts: Symbol Storage location

No sym bol

In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone

Seite 188

Communication Bluetooth hands-free system

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries. 4. Move the MINI joystick to the left. 5. "Yes" If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi cle, and only this copy is displayed. Under cer tain circumstances, a contact entry with the same name is created.

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another

destination"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.

Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "My contacts" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name" Depending on how the contacts are stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or der.

Deleting contacts 1. "My contacts" 2. Highlight the contact. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"

Seite 189

Bluetooth hands-free system Communication

189Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

At a glance The concept Mobile phones or other external devices such as audio players can be connected to the vehi cle via Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG, Inc. After these devices are paired once, they are recognized automatically when the ignition is switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle and can then be operated via the onboard monitor, using the buttons on the steering wheel, and via voice activation. Depending on their functionality, external devi ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone or as an audio source. The telephone functions are described in the following. Operating the audio functions, refer to page 173. Up to four external devices can be paired. Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone provider or service provider.

Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the

hands-free system instead. If you do not ob serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve hicle occupants and other road users.

Snap-in adapter The snap-in adapter is used to: Hold the mobile phone. Recharge the battery. Connect the mobile phone to an outside

antenna of the vehicle. This provides for better network reception and consistent sound quality.

Approved mobile phones

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation package. The software ver sion of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth info" 4. "Display system information" These approved mobile phones with a certain software version, support the vehicle functions described below. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions. Do not operate a mobile phone that is con nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

Seite 190

Communication Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed. When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, note the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone General information The following functions are available: Use of a mobile phone as a telephone. Use of a mobile phone as an additional te

lephone. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. Use of an audio device as an audio source,

refer to page 173.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable, refer to

page 190. The mobile phone is ready for operation. Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone. Bluetooth presettings may need to be

made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con nection without confirmation or visibility, refer to the mobile phone operating in structions.

Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. Compare the control number on the Control

Display with the control number on the mo bile phone display. Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the vehicle.

A number with at least four and a maxi mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue

tooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing.

The radio ready state is switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth"

Additional functions

Activating/deactivating the additional functions Activate the functions before pairing to be able to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit able mobile phones, refer to page 190, that support this function.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 5. Select the desired additional function.

"Additional telephone" "Office" "Bluetooth audio"

6. "OK" An additional function cannot be assigned to a telephone while it is deactivated.

Seite 191

Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package Communication

191Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Additional telephone A mobile phone can be used as an additional telephone. The additional telephone can be used to accept incoming calls, refer to page 195. While a call is active on the additional telephone, received calls are displayed on the Control Display.

Office Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle.

Bluetooth audio A mobile phone can be used as an audio source. "Bluetooth audio" To use a mobile phone in the vehicle as a tele phone only, deactivate the function and recon nect the mobile phone.

Pairing and connecting a mobile phone Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta tionary.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played.

4. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions: for instance, search for or con nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

6. You are prompted by the onboard monitor or mobile phone to enter the same Blue tooth passkey. Enter the passkey and confirm. or Compare the control number on the vehicle display with the control number on the mo bile phone display. Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the vehicle. "OK"

7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.

8. "OK" 9. Move the MINI joystick to the left.

Seite 192

Communication Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. The functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols when paired. White symbol: the function is active. Gray symbol: the function is inactive. Symbol Function

Telephone.

Additional telephone.

Audio source.

Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be con nected with the vehicle at once. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re fer to page 194.

Following the initial pairing The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detection, depending on the mobile phone.

Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se cure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

Connecting a particular mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired mobile phones are listed.

3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con nected.

The functions assigned to the mobile phone before unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone when it is reconnected. These functions are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al ready connected.

Device options Device options can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices.

Configuring the mobile phone Additional functions can be activated or deacti vated for paired and connected mobile phones.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config

ured. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Configure phone"

6. At least one function must be selected. "Telephone"

Seite 193

Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package Communication

193Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

"Additional telephone" "Audio"

7. "OK" If a function has already been assigned to an other connected mobile phone, the function is deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo bile phone is unpaired when the function is as signed to a new mobile phone.

Swapping the telephone and additional telephone If a phone and additional phone are connected to the vehicle, the function can be swapped be tween the two devices.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)" 3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"

Using a mobile phone as an audio source An audio-capable mobile phone can be used as an audio source. Activate Bluetooth audio, refer to page 192. Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle and connect it, refer to page 192. The mobile phone is used as the audio source, provided that another device has not been con nected as the audio source. If another device has already been connected as the audio source:

1. Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle and connect it, refer to page 192.

2. "Use for audio" The mobile phone is connected as an audio source. The previous audio source is no lon ger connected to the vehicle.

Unpairing a device 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired devices are listed.

3. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 190. The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected. Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone.

Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via the onboard monitor.

A multi-character passkey may be needed. Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter

the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure. Are too many Bluetooth devices connected

to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con nections with other devices if necessary.

Is the audio connection activated? Deacti vate the audio connection.

Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via the charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi ble that only one mobile phone can be con nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and connect only one mobile phone.

Seite 194

Communication Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The mobile phone no longer reacts. Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Is the ambient temperature too high or

low? Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme environmental conditions.

The telephone functions are not available. Is the mobile phone paired as an additional

telephone and is the additional telephone function deactivated? Activate the function.

Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.

No phone book entries or only some phone book entries are displayed, or they are incom plete. Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete. It is possible that only the phone book en

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

Is the data volume of the contact too large, e. g., due to stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume of the con tact.

Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or additional telephone? The mobile phone must be connected as a telephone.

The phone connection quality is poor. The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.

Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the area of the center console.

Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, con tact Customer Relations or the service center.

Controls Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is se lected. The setting is stored for the remote con trol currently in use.

The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the telephone and the vol ume of the called party. Depending on the mo bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad justed. The settings can only be created during a call and must be adjusted separately for each tele phone. The settings are deleted when the tele phone is unpaired.

1. "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings" 4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or

"Loudspeak." 5. To set: turn the MINI joystick. 6. To save: press the MINI joystick.

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Other wise, only the phone number is displayed.

Seite 195

Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package Communication

195Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

If more than one phone number is assigned to a contact, only the name of the contact is dis played. For calls on the additional telephone, the num ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the network. An incoming call to one of the telephones is au tomatically rejected if there is an active call on the other telephone.

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

or "Accept"

Rejecting a call "Reject"

The caller is redirected to the mailbox if the mailbox was activated

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

or

1. "Telephone"

2. "End call"

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number 1. "Telephone" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the digits individually. 4. Select the symbol.

The phone number can also be entered by voice.

Calls with multiple parties

General information You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly.

Seite 196

Communication Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal is sounded.

"Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Return" The call on hold is resumed.

Switching between two calls, hold call Active call: highlighted. Call on hold identified by: "on hold...".

Select the symbol to change to the call on hold.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

Switching the microphone to mute When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Microphone mute"

A microphone that has been switched to mute is automatically reactivated: When a new connection is established. When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac cess to network services or for controlling devi ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an

Seite 197

Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package Communication

197Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Telephone" 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial

number". 3. "Keypad dialing"

4. Enter the DTMF code on the onboard moni tor.

DTMF suffix dialing is not possible during con ference calls.

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book" A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Calling a contact

Symbol Meaning

Contact with one stored phone num ber.

Contact with more than one stored phone number.

Call not possible; mobile phone with out reception or network.

For contacts with one stored phone number: select the required contact. The connection is being established. For contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the required contact and the phone number. The connection is being estab lished.

Editing a contact Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a contact is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Edit entry" The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle. The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis played. The sorting order of the phone num bers depends on the particular mobile phone.

Seite 198

Communication Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Dialing a number on the onboard monitor 1. "Telephone" 2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry and the phone number if necessary.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your partic ular mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"

Received calls

Displaying calls The list of received calls on the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle, depending on the particular mobile phone. It is possible that only

those calls are displayed that were received in the vehicle. The 20 telephone calls that were last received are displayed. The sorting order and display of the phone numbers depends on the particular mobile phone.

1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list Selecting an entry. The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your partic ular mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. 5. Select the type of number: "Home",

"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"

Seite 199

Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package Communication

199Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Snap-in adapter General information More information on compatible snap-in adapters that support the functions of the mo bile phone is available at the service center.

Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions may not be executed. When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, note the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

Installation position In the center armrest.

Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter 1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en gages.

3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but ton 1.

Inserting the mobile phone 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove

the protective cap from the antenna con nector and from the USB connection of the mobile phone.

2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile phone up toward the electrical contacts and press it down until it engages.

The battery is charged beginning with the radio ready state of the vehicle.

Seite 200

Communication Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

Seite 201

Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package Communication

201Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Office Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

At a glance General information Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can be displayed on the Control Display if the mo bile phone provides compatible support of these functions and the necessary Bluetooth standards. Information about which mobile phones and functions are available can be found at www.mini.com/connectivity. Contents are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. The mobile phone has read-access only.

Do not use Office while driving To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.

Requirements A suitable mobile phone is paired with the

vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone.

The time, time zone, and date, refer to page 72, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone, for in stance to correctly display appointments.

Updating Data are updated every time the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be up dated separately.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",

"Notes" or "Reminders" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Update data"

Mobile phone data are transmitted again to the vehicle.

Office information The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as the upcoming appointments are displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Current office" 3. Select the desired entry to display details.

Seite 202

Communication Office

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Contacts At a glance Contacts can be created and edited. The con tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be adopted as desti nations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

Displaying contacts

General information 1. "Office" 2. "Contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts. Symbol Storage location

No sym bol

In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone.

Dialing a phone number 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. 2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries. 4. "Store contact in vehicle" When a contact is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the en try is stored in the vehicle.

Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address.

When contacts from the mobile phone are used, the address may need to be matched to the navigation data contained in the ve hicle. In this case: Correct the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con

Seite 203

Office Communication

203Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

New contact

General information A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter net address.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "New contact"

5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ ous entries: "Delete input fields"

6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. 8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation

system: enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the ve hicle can be entered. This ensures that des tination guidance is possible for all ad dresses.

If necessary, "Accept address". 9. "Store contact in vehicle"

Contact types Various contact types can be assigned to phone numbers and addresses. Symbol Meaning

Home phone number.

Business phone number.

Mobile phone number.

Other phone number.

Home address.

Business address.

Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. "Home" 4. Create a contact. 5. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name" Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or der.

Seite 204

Communication Office

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Show contact pictures Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is con nected to the vehicle. The number of transmit ted pictures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile phone must support this function.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Configure Bluetooth" 5. "Show images" Display of all contact pictures is activated or de activated.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted.

1. "Office" 2. "Contacts" 3. Highlight the contact. 4. Open "Options". 5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"

Messages General information Whether or not text messages and e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed depends on whether transmission from the mobile phone to the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e-mails may not be supported by the service provider, or the function may need to be ena bled separately. After the mobile phone is first paired, transmission may take several minutes. Messages are only displayed in full length when the vehicle is stationary. Messages from the ad ditional telephone are not transmitted.

Displaying messages 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" A symbol identifies the type of message. Symbol Message type

Text messages.

E-mail from mobile phone.

Filtering the message list The message list can be filtered if more than one type of message exists.

1. "Filter:" 2. Select the type of message.

"All" All messages are displayed.

"Text message" Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed.

"E-mail" Only e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed.

Text messages

Calling the sender of a text message 1. Select the desired message. 2. Select the symbol.

Saving the sender in the contacts 1. Highlight the desired message. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing

contact"

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or selected, refer to page 208.

Seite 205

Office Communication

205Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Reading the text message out loud Read the text message out loud, refer to page 208.

E-mail

Displaying e-mails 1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Select the desired e-mail.

Displaying e-mail contacts If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are transmitted by the mobile phone, this informa tion is displayed in the e-mail.

"Sender/Recipient" If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con tact to display details. If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the contacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or selected, refer to page 208.

Deactivating the full display When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may result in charges.

1. "Office" 2. "Messages" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Fully download e-mails"

Only a part of the e-mail from the mobile phone is loaded into the vehicle.

Reading the e-mail out loud Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 208.

Calendar Display the calendar Appointments during the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Calendar"

The appointments on the current day are displayed.

Selecting the calendar day 1. Select the date.

2. Select the desired day or date. "Next day" "Date:" "Previous day" "Today"

Display the appointment 1. Select the desired appointment. 2. Scroll through the appointment if neces

sary: Turn the MINI joystick. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or selected, refer to page 208.

Seite 206

Communication Office

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Reading the appointment out loud Read the appointment out loud, refer to page 208.

Tasks Displaying the task list Display tasks that are due within the next 90 days.

1. "Office" 2. "Tasks"

Sorting the task list 1. Select the header in the task list.

2. Select the sorting criterion: "Priority (!)" "Subject" "Due date"

Displaying the task 1. Select the desired task. 2. Scroll in the task if necessary:

Turn the MINI joystick. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or selected, refer to page 208.

Reading the task out loud Read the task out loud, refer to page 208.

Notes Displaying notes 1. "Office" 2. "Notes"

All notes are displayed.

Displaying the note 1. Select the desired note.

2. Scroll in the note if necessary: Turn the MINI joystick. Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or selected, refer to page 208.

Reading the note out loud Read the note out loud, refer to page 208.

Seite 207

Office Communication

207Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Reminders Displaying reminders Reminders of pending appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment or after a task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.

1. "Office" 2. "Reminders" 3. Select the desired reminder. The corresponding appointment or the task are displayed.

Using contact data At a glance Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or selected.

Displaying contact or selecting phone number 1. "Use contact data"

2. Display the contact or select the phone number: Select the contact to display contact de

tails. Select the phone number to establish a

connection directly.

Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data" 2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad

dress. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new

contact"

Reading out loud Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, tasks, and notes can be read out loud.

1. Select the desired message, appointment, task, or note.

2. Select the symbol. The following options are available during reading: "Pause"

Interrupt reading. Select again to restart reading.

"Back to beginning" Start reading the message again from the beginning.

Select the symbol. Go back one paragraph.

Select the symbol. Skip a paragraph.

To end reading, move the MINI joystick to the left.

What to do if... Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 190. Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis played.

Seite 208

Communication Office

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

The mobile phone is not capable of the missing function or is not connected cor rectly.

The Office function is deactivated. The mobile phone is connected as an addi

tional phone. Appointments are older than 20 days or are

more than 50 days in the future. The tasks have been marked as completed

or have a due date that lies more than 90 days in the future.

Depending on the number of stored ap pointments, task notes, and messages in the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the vehicle.

Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile phone are displayed at the right time? The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly

set on the Control Display and mobile phone.

Entries are not displayed in full length. Text were already transmitted from the

mobile phone in a shortened form. Synchronization between the mobile phone

and vehicle may take several minutes. The contact pictures are not being displayed? Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in

the vehicle. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.

Seite 209

Office Communication

209Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI Connected Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

At a glance The concept Certain software applications of a suitable mo bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Control Display. They are operated via the onboard monitor. The scope of the software applications may vary by country.

Requirements The mobile phone is suitable. The mobile phone operating system sup

ports the software applications of MINI Connected.

Software applications are installed on the mobile phone and ready to use.

Corresponding mobile wireless contract. Any additionally incurred costs are not a part of MINI Connected.

Information about suitable mobile phones, available software applications, and their instal lation can be obtained at www.mini.com/ connectivity or from the service center.

Create the entries. Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu pants and other road users may be put in dan ger because of the distraction from driving. For reasons of safety, some software applica tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta tionary.

Software applications Use only software applications approved

by the manufacturer of your MINI; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.

Connecting the mobile phone Connection via the USB audio interface

The USB audio interface is in the center console. Connect the mobile phone to the USB interface and the AV-IN port using a special adapter cable

available from the service center.

To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone operating in structions: for instance, selecting and activating software applications.

Connection via the snap-in adapter The mobile phone can also be connected, refer to page 200, via the snap-in adapter.

Operating MINI Connected After the mobile phone is successfully con nected with the vehicle and MINI Connected is started, the applications are displayed on the

Seite 210

Communication MINI Connected

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Control Display and can be operated using the MINI joystick. The volume can be set using the following con trols:

Buttons on the steering wheel or

Volume button on the radio, refer to page 158

1. Connect the mobile phone via the snap-in adapter or via the USB audio interface.

2. Press the button. The main menu is opened.

3. "MINI Connected"

4. Select the desired software application.

Notes The scope of MINI Connected that can be

displayed on the Control Display depends on the range of software applications in stalled on the mobile phone.

The data transmission of the software ap plications from the mobile phone to the ve hicle can last some time. Some software applications depend on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile phone.

Some mobile phones cannot simultane ously use MINI Connected and the Blue tooth hands-free system.

If necessary, restart the software applica tion on the mobile phone after a phone conversation.

Audio and video playback from the snap-in adapter is only possible if no cable is con nected to the AV-IN port.

PlugIn The concept Selected functions of a compatible Apple de vice can be displayed on the Control Display via a video connection. They are operated using the MINI joystick and the button on the MINI joystick.

Functional requirement Suitable iPhone or iPod: as of iPhone 3GS or

iPod with software version iOS 4.1 and higher.

The MINI Connected app is not required. Information on compatible adapters and inter faces can be obtained from the service center.

Activating 1. Connect the Apple device.

Operation takes place via the MINI joystick with its buttons.

2. "MINI Connected" 3. "PlugIn" 4. Select the connection type: "Activate via

AUX connection" or"Activate via Snap-In adapter"

5. "Activate PlugIn" 6. Use the MINI joystick to navigate among

the displayed functions and select, for ex ample, a desired category or track.

Controls The PlugIn is activated to display the graphic output of the connected device on the Control

Seite 211

MINI Connected Communication

211Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Display. This changes the operating functions of the MINI joystick and the MINI buttons until the PlugIn is deactivated again. The operation of the PlugIn depends on the iOS version in use, e.g., iOS 4.1.

Home button

Press the button to select the following functions: Press 1x: opens the display menu bar. Press 2x: opens the main menu. Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the

left 1x: opens the MINI Connected menu. Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the

left 2x: opens the main menu.

Toggle button

Press the button to select the following functions. Press 1x: return to the next higher menu

level of the iPhones/iPods.

MINI joystick Press: selection/play/pause. Turn: navigate through the lists. Move to the left: jump to the beginning of

the current music track or to the previous music track in the playback list.

Move the left and hold: reverse. Move to the right: jump to the next music

track in the playback list. Move to the right and hold: fast forward.

Deactivating There are several methods of deactivating the PlugIn and returning to the MINI operating level.

Via the home button Press 1x: returns to activating the PlugIn.

Press 2x: opens the main menu. Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the

left 1x: opens the MINI Connected menu. Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the

left 2x. Opens the main menu.

Via the audio source button

Press 1x: changes to the audio source selected last.

Seite 212

Communication MINI Connected

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Seite 213

MINI Connected Communication

213Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MOVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

At a glance

Controls

Driving tips

Navigation

Entertainment

Communication

Mobility

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Refueling Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

General information Refuel promptly At the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function is not ensured and damage may occur.

Notes Switch off the engine before refueling Always switch off the engine before refu

eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the tank and a message will be displayed.

Observe when handling fuel Take all precautionary measures and

observe all applicable regulations when handling fuel.

Do not carry any spare fuel containers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.

Fuel cap Opening 1. Open fuel filler flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached

to the fuel filler flap.

Closing 1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click. 2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.

A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap can be released manually: MINI Countryman:

Seite 216

Mobility Refueling

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI Paceman:

1. Open the cargo area trim, arrow. 2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump

symbol. This opens the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when refueling When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: Premature pump shutoff. Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov

ery system. The fuel tank is full after refueling is resumed twice after the filler nozzle switches off for the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,

escaping fuel may harm the environment or damage the vehicle.

Handling fuels Follow the safety instructions provided at

gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury and property damage.

Fuel tank capacity Approx. 12.3 US gal/47 liters, including a re serve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.

Seite 217

Refueling Mobility

217Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Fuel Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Fuel recommendation Gasoline For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel pump as containing metals.

Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with out metal additives

Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron; otherwise, the catalytic converter and other components will be permanently damaged.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling. The ethanol should fulfill the following quality standards: US: ASTM 4806xx CAN: CGSB-3.511xx xx: always adhere to the currently applicable standard.

Do not refuel with ethanol E85 Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an

ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system.

The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you can refuel with different gasoline qualities.

Gasoline quality The manufacturer of your MINI recommends: AKI 91. John Cooper Works AKI 93.

Minimum fuel grade The manufacturer of your MINI recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel grade Do not fill up with fuel below the speci

fied minimum quality; otherwise, the engine may not run properly.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Minimum fuel grade The use of poor-quality fuels may result in

harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environ mental conditions such as high ambient tem perature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur chase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled mainte nance.

Seite 218

Mobility Fuel

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Seite 219

Fuel Mobility

219Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Tire inflation pressure Safety information It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres sure.

Checking the pressure Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pressure

and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with in correct tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stabil ity, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with depressurized or flat tires, ex cept for run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking re sponse. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the

tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher. After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 88 or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 86.

To check the inflation pressure, there is a valve extension behind the bumper.

Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct infla tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at am bient temperature. The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recommended by the manufacturer of the MINI; a list of these is available from the service center. For correct identification of the right tire infla tion pressures, observe the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort. These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's door is open.

Seite 220

Mobility Wheels and tires

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and acci dents may occur.

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

Adjust the tire inflation pressures To drive at maximum speeds in excess of

100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re spective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci dents could occur.

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could occur.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 261.

Seite 221

Wheels and tires Mobility

221Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper S/Countryman Cooper S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 261.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman John Cooper Works

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 261.

Seite 222

Mobility Wheels and tires

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 262.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper S / Paceman Cooper S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 262.

Seite 223

Wheels and tires Mobility

223Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman John Cooper Works

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 262.

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V 225: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 17: rim diameter in inches 91: load rating, not for ZR tires

Speed letter Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1012 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 1012: tire age

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

Seite 224

Mobility Wheels and tires

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Conform to Federal Safety Requirements All passenger car tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving hab its, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under control led conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hy droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi

cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re quired by law.

Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC Run-flat tires The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to page 228.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than summer tires.

XL Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire tread Summer tires The tread depth should not be less than 0.12 in/3 mm, although European legislation, for example, requires a minimum tread depth of only 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths less than 0.12 in/3 mm, there is a great danger of hydroplaning even in low water depths and at raised speeds.

Winter tires The suitability of winter tires for winter driving is reduced noticeably when their tread depth becomes less than 0.16 in/4 mm.

Seite 225

Wheels and tires Mobility

225Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators in the tread base are distrib uted around the circumference of the tire and are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. When the tire tread has been worn down to the wear indicators, a tread has reached a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

Tire damage General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Notes Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low- profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de fects: Unusual vibrations during driving. Unusual handling such as a strong ten

dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by driving over curbs, road damage and similar situations.

In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re

duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; other wise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop. If necessary, have the vehicle towed. Otherwise, tire damage can present a life- threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users.

Repair of tire damage For safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re sult.

Tire age Recommendation For several reasons, among other things be cause of beginning brittleness, the manufac turer of your MINI recommends mounting new tires at the latest after six years, regardless of the actual wear.

Manufacture date The date of manufacture of the tires is specified in the tire label: DOT 2313: the tire was manufactured in week 23 of 2013.

Seite 226

Mobility Wheels and tires

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Changing wheels and tires Mounting

Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center or tire specialist. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Wheel and tire combination Information on the right wheel and tire combi nation and rim version for your vehicle can be obtained from the service center. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse, use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom

mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu ate non-approved wheels and tires to deter mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi cle if they are mounted.

Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect a flat tire, refer to page 87. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands. These are indicated by the clearly visible marking on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.

Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de

sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.

Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 /+7 . Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform ance as winter tires.

Seite 227

Wheels and tires Mobility

227Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for

the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac cidents can occur.

Run-flat tires When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run- flat tires for your own safety. Also, a compact wheel is not available in case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns occur on the front and rear axles, depending on the individual condi tions of use. To ensure even wear on the tires, the wheels can be rotated between the axles. Your service center will be glad to advise you. After changing the tires, check the tire inflation pressure and correct it if necessary.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires Label

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall. Run-flat tires are tires with special rims that support themselves for a limited period of time. The sidewall reinforcement ensures that the tire can continue to be used to a limited extent if it has lost pressure and even if it has become completely depressurized. For continued driving in the event of a flat tire, refer to page 86.

Correcting a flat tire Safety measures in case of a breakdown Park the vehicle as far as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warn ing system.

Let the steering wheel lock engage with the wheels in the straight-ahead position, set the handbrake, and engage first gear or re verse, or engage selector lever position P.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

Seite 228

Mobility Wheels and tires

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

If a warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp is required, set it up on the roadside at an appropriate distance from the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

The procedure to correct a flat tire depends on the equipment in the vehicle: Run-flat tires, refer to page 228. MINI Mobility System, refer to page 229.

MINI Mobility System Notes Follow the instructions on using the Mobi

lity System found on the compressor and sealant bottle.

Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec tive if tire damage is greater than approx. 1/8 in/4 mm in size.

Contact the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable.

If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire.

Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.

Sealant and compressor

1 Sealant bottle and speed limit sticker 2 Filling hose

Note the use-by date on the sealant bottle.

3 Holder for the sealant bottle 4 Compressor 5 Connector and cable for the lighter socket/

socket in passenger compartment109. 6 Connection hose for connecting the com

pressor and sealant bottle or the compres sor and wheel

7 On/off switch 8 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire infla

tion pressure 9 Release button for reducing the tire infla

tion pressure

The connector, cable, and connecting hose are stowed in the compressor housing.

Using the Mobility System To repair a flat tire with the Mobility System, proceed as follows: Filling the tire with sealant Distributing the sealant Correcting the tire inflation pressure

Filling the tire with sealant Adhere to the specified sequence Adhere to the specified sequence of the

steps; otherwise, sealant may escape under high pressure.

1. Shake the sealant bottle. 2. Pull the connection hose 6 fully out of the

compressor housing and screw it onto the sealant bottle connection. Ensure that the connection hose is not kinked.

Seite 229

Wheels and tires Mobility

229Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compres sor housing in a vertical position.

4. Unscrew the dust cap off of the valve of the defective wheel and screw the filling hose 2 of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off. 6. Insert connector 5 into the lighter socket/

socket in the passenger compartment, refer to page 109.

7. When the engine is running: Switch on the compressor and let it run for approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill sealant into the tire and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 1.8 bar/26 psi. While sealant is being filled, the inflation pressure may intermittently rise to approx. 5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the com pressor in this phase.

8. Switch off the compressor. Do not allow the compressor to run too long

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.

If an air pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is not reached:

1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel and drive forward and back approx. 33 ft/10 m to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.

2. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.

If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged. Contact the nearest service center.

Stowing the Mobility System 1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 of the sealant

bottle from the wheel. 2. Unscrew the compressor connection hose 6

from the sealant bottle. 3. Connect the filling hose 2 of the sealant

bottle with the free connector on the seal ant bottle. This prevents left-over sealant from escap ing from the bottle.

4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi cle.

Distributing the sealant Drive approx. 3.1 miles/5 km to evenly distrib ute the sealant. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drop below a speed of 10 mph/20 km/h.

Correcting the tire inflation pressure 1. After driving approx. 3.1 miles/5 km, or

about 10 minutes, stop in a suitable loca tion.

2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com pressor directly onto the tire valve.

3. Insert the connector 5 into the power socket in the passenger compartment.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 1.8 bar/26 psi. When the engine is running: To increase the inflation pressure:

switch on the compressor. To check the currently set inflation pressure, switch off the compressor.

To reduce the inflation pressure: press the release button 9.

Seite 230

Mobility Wheels and tires

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Do not allow the compressor to run too long

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.

If the inflation pressure is not maintained, take the vehicle on another drive, distributing the sealant, refer to page 230. Then repeat steps 1 to 4 once. If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged. Contact the nearest service center.

Continuing the trip Note the maximum speed Do not exceed the maximum speed of

50 mph/80 km/h; otherwise, accidents can oc cur.

Replace the defective tire as soon as possible and have the wheel balanced. Have the Mobility System refilled.

Snow chains Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by MINI, classified as safe for use, and recommended. Consult your service center for more information. Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with tires of the following size: 195/60 R 16 M+S With ALL4 all-wheel drive: only mount snow chains on the front wheels. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h when using snow chains. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, it may be useful to tempora

rily deactivate DSC or activate DTC, refer to page 93.

Seite 231

Wheels and tires Mobility

231Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Engine compartment Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number 2 Battery, under the cover246 3 Dip stick for engine oil234 4 Engine oil filler neck234

5 Coolant expansion tank236 6 Engine compartment fuse box247 7 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlamp

and window washer system64

Hood Notes

Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Seite 232

Mobility Engine compartment

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are resting against the wind

shield before you open the engine compart ment. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down; otherwise, injuries may result.

Unlocking and opening the hood 1. Pull the lever.

2. Lift the hood all the way. 3. Press the release handle and open the

hood.

Danger of injury when the hood is open There is a danger of injury from protrud

ing parts when the hood is open.

Closing the hood

Close the hood from a height of ap prox. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im mediately and close it securely.

Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Seite 233

Engine compartment Mobility

233Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Engine oil Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Engine oil General information Engine oil consumption depends on the driving style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty driving style, for example, results in considera bly higher engine oil consumption. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling.

Checking the oil level with a dip stick 1. Park the vehicle on level ground when the

engine is at operating temperature, i.e., af ter driving continuously for at least 6 2 miles/10 km.

2. Switch the engine off. 3. After approx. 5 minutes, pull out the dip

stick and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth, paper towel, etc.

4. Carefully insert the dip stick all the way into the measuring tube and pull it out again.

The oil level must be between the two marks on the dip stick.

The oil quantity between the two marks on the dip stick equals approx. 1 US quart/1 liter.

Do not exceed the high mark. Do not exceed the high mark of the dip

stick. Overfilling oil damages the engine.

Adding engine oil

Filler neck

Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of oil only after the corresponding message ap pears on the Control Display or, in diesel en gines, after the oil level is just above the low mark of the dip stick, refer to page 234.

Add oil promptly Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km;

otherwise, engine damage could result.

Seite 234

Mobility Engine oil

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam age.

Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil

dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.

Oil types for refilling

Notes No oil additives Do not use oil additives as these may

cause engine damage.

Viscosity classes of engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE viscos ity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Due to national regulations, some oil types are not available in every country.

Approved oil types

Gasoline engine

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Further information on approved oil types can be obtained from the service center.

Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/1 liter of an oil with the following specification can be used:

Gasoline engine

API SM or a higher quality standard

Oil change An oil change should be carried out by the serv ice center only.

Seite 235

Engine oil Mobility

235Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Coolant Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

General information Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the

engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.

Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.

Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your MINI vehicle. Ask your service center for suitable additives.

Coolant temperature If the coolant and therefore the engine over heat, a warning lamp lights up. A message ap pears on the Control Display.

Coolant level Checking 1. Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down.

2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock wise slightly to allow any accumulated pressure to escape; then continue turning to open.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the markings. The markings are located on the side of the coolant reservoir.

Refilling 1. Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down. 2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock

wise slightly to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.

3. If the coolant level is low, slowly add cool ant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Twist the cap closed. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi

nated as soon as possible.

Disposal Comply with the appropriate environ mental protection regulations when dis

posing of coolant additives.

Seite 236

Mobility Coolant

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Maintenance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

MINI maintenance system

The MINI maintenance system provides infor mation on required maintenance measures and thus provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the ve hicle.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the various driving conditions of your MINI. Based on this, Condition Based Service determines the current and future mainte nance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile.

Detailed information on service requirements can be displayed on the Control Display, refer to page 74.

Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and sug gest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service spe cialist the remote control that you used most recently.

Setting the correct date Make sure the date is set correctly; other

wise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.

Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Book let for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require ments. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have regu lar maintenance procedures recorded in the ve hicle's Service and Warranty Information Book let for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries are proof of regular maintenance.

Seite 237

Maintenance Mobility

237Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may

only be used by the service center, by work shops that operate according to the specifica tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro priately trained personnel, and by other authorized persons. Otherwise, its use may lead to vehicle malfunctions.

Primary components in the vehicle emissions can be checked via the OBD socket using a de vice.

Emissions The warning lamps light up. The vehicle is producing higher emissions. You can continue your journey, but moderate

your speed and exercise due caution. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps flashes or lights up continuously. This indicates that there is excessive misfiring or a malfunc tion in the engine. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed and drive to the next service cen ter promptly. Serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter. In addition, the mechanical engine components may become damaged.

If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight ened, the OBD system may conclude

that fuel vapor is escaping; this will cause a dis play to light up. If the filler cap is then tight ened, the display should go out in a few days.

Seite 238

Mobility Maintenance

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Replacing components Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Wiper blade replacement General information

Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.

Replacing the front wiper blades 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm. 2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and

fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mechanism toward the front.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation until it engages audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Risk of damage Before opening the hood, ensure that the

wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto the window; otherwise, damage may occur.

Replacing the rear wiper blade MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm. 2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back, ar

row. 3. Press the wiper blade against the stop to

push it out of the fixation. 4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation

until it engages audibly. 5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Seite 239

Replacing components Mobility

239Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Lamp and bulb replace ment Notes

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety. Therefore, exercise cau tion when handling lamps and bulbs. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.

Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system,

you should always switch off the lights affected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Caring for the headlamps, refer to page 255. For bulb replacement that is not described here, please contact the service center or a workshop that works according to the repair procedures of the manufacturer with corre spondingly trained personnel.

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your MINI dealer.

Light-emitting diodes LEDs Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in the vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate us ing a concept similar to that applied in conven tional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.

Headlamp glass Condensation can form on the inside of the headlamps in cool or humid weather. When the light is switched on, the condensation evapo rates after a short time. The headlamps do not need to be changed. If the condensation in the headlamps does not evaporate after trips with the lights switched on, and the amount of moisture in the head lamps increases, for example if water droplets form, have them checked by your service cen ter.

Bi-xenon headlamps These bulbs have a very long life and the likeli hood of failure is very low, provided that they are not switched on and off excessively. If a bulb should nevertheless fail, you can continue driving cautiously with the front fog lamps, pro vided this is permitted by local laws.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center.

Seite 240

Mobility Replacing components

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Front lamps, bulb replacement

Halogen low beams and high beams Bulb H13, 60/55 watt

Wear protective goggles and gloves Halogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore,

wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise, there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci dentally damaged during replacement.

Attach the cover carefully When attaching the cover, proceed care

fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam age to the headlamp system.

Access to the bulbs through the engine compartment Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 240. Low beam/high beam bulbs can be changed from the engine compartment.

To remove the cover:

1. Press the tab. 2. Fold away the cover and take it out of the

holder. Proceed in reverse order to attach the cover.

Attach the cover carefully When attaching the cover, proceed care

fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam age to the headlamp system.

Replacing the bulb 1. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, arrow 1,

and remove it, arrow 2.

2. Press the release, arrow 1, and pull off the connector, arrow 2.

3. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in reverse order.

Turn signal, parking lamp, roadside parking lamp, and front fog lamp

Access to the bulbs via the wheel housing Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 240.

Seite 241

Replacing components Mobility

241Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

1 Turn signal 2 Parking lamp/roadside parking lamp/fog

lamp

Replacing the turn signal bulb 21-watt bulb, P 21 W, or PY 21 W

1. Turn the wheel. 2. Remove cover 1.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise. 3. Remove the inside cover. To do this, turn

the cover counterclockwise.

4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re move it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the covers in reverse order.

Replacing the parking lamp bulb and roadside parking lamp bulb 5-watt bulb, W 5 W

1. Turn the wheel. 2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise. 3. Turn the upper bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in reverse order.

Replacing the front fog lamp bulb H8 bulb, 35 watt

1. Turn the wheel. 2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise. 3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector. 4. Turn the lower bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in reverse order.

Seite 242

Mobility Replacing components

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Lateral turn signals 5-watt bulb, W 5 W

1. Open the hood.

2. Squeeze the clip, arrows, and remove the bulb holder.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it to the left and replace it.

4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in reverse order.

Side marker lamps To replace these bulbs, contact the service cen ter.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 240. Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, PY 21 W

MINI Countryman

1 Brake/tail lamp 2 Turn signal

3 Brake/tail lamp 4 Backup lamp

MINI Paceman

1 Brake lamp 2 Tail lamp 3 Turn signal 4 Backup lamp

Replacing All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.

MINI Countryman 1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock. 2. Open the tailgate. 3. Press the cover out of the cargo area side

panel at the rear and remove it.

4. Detach the emergency release of the fuel filler flap, refer to page 216, and push it aside with the foam insert. Ensure that the emergency release is not damaged.

Seite 243

Replacing components Mobility

243Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

5. Disengage the bulb holder by pushing down the clip, arrow 1.

6. Take out the bulb holder and detach the cable, arrow 2.

7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left and remove it.

8. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulb holder in reverse order. Ensure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

9. Return the foam insert to its original posi tion and reattach the emergency release of the fuel filler flap.

10. Reattach the cover.

MINI Paceman 1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock. 2. Open the tailgate. 3. Remove the cover from the cargo area side

trim.

4. Unlock the fastening elements, arrows 1, by turning.

5. Remove the screws, arrows 2, using the hex key from the vehicle document portfolio.

6. Remove the tail lamp. 7. Disengage the bulb holder by pushing

down the clip, arrows 1.

8. Take out the bulb holder and detach the cable, arrow 2.

9. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left and remove it.

10. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulb holder in reverse order. Ensure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

License plate lamps 5-watt bulb, C 5 W

Seite 244

Mobility Replacing components

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Replacing

MINI Countryman 1. Push the lamp to the left in the catch of the

lamp housing using the screwdriver, ar row 1.

2. Take out the lamp, arrow 2. 3. Replace the bulb. 4. Insert the lamp.

MINI Paceman 1. Push the lamp to the left in the catch of the

lamp housing using the screwdriver, ar row 1.

2. Take out the lamp, arrow 2. 3. Replace the bulb. 4. Insert the lamp.

Center brake lamp This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In case of a defect, please contact your service center or a workshop that works according to the repair procedures of the manufacturer of your MINI with correspondingly trained person nel.

Changing wheels Notes The vehicle may be equipped with conven tional tires with the Mobility System, refer to page 229, or with run-flat tires, refer to page 228. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Suitable tools for changing the wheels are available from the service center as an acces sory.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated in the positions shown.

Seite 245

Replacing components Mobility

245Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec trolyte will last for the life of the battery in tem perate climate conditions. The service center will be happy to answer any questions on the battery.

Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa ble.

Have the vehicle battery registered by the serv ice center after it is replaced to ensure that all comfort functions are available without restric tions and that any associated Check Control messages are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

Note Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to the

socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as this could damage the battery.

Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the engine is switched off. Connections, refer to page 248.

General information Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to achieve the full battery life. It may be necessary to charge the battery in the following cases: When the vehicle is frequently used to

travel short distances. When the vehicle has not been driven for

more than one month.

Power failure After a temporary power failure, some equip ment will be restricted in its use and will need to be reinitialized. In addition, certain individual settings will be lost and must be updated: Time and date: the values must be up

dated, refer to page 72. Radio: the stations need to be stored again,

refer to page 159. Onboard monitor: full functionality will be

restored after some time. Glass sunroof, electrical: it may only be pos

sible to tilt the roof. The system needs to be initialized. Contact the service center.

Indicator/warning lamps Lights up red: the vehicle battery is no longer being charged. Alternator mal function.

Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers. Have the battery checked immediately.

Lights up yellow: the battery charge level is very low, the battery is old, or it is not securely connected.

Charge the battery by taking a long drive or us ing an external charger. If the indicators appear again, have the battery checked as soon as possible.

Disposing of old batteries Have used batteries disposed of by the service center after they are replaced or take them to a recycling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Seite 246

Mobility Replacing components

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Fuses Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re sulting in a fire in the vehicle.

Fuses should be replaced by the service center. Information on the fuses can be found on the inside of the covers.

In the engine compartment

Opening the cover Press the snap lock.

In interior

On the right side of the footwell.

Opening the cover Push out at the recess.

Seite 247

Replacing components Mobility

247Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Hazard warning flash ers

The button is located on the speedometer.

Warning triangle

Under the loading edge in the cargo area. To remove, open the two fasteners.

First aid kit Some of the articles contained in the first aid kit have a limited service life. Therefore, check the use-by dates of the contents regularly and re place the items before they expire.

The first aid kit is located in the left side trim on the cargo area floor or under the loading floor.

Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain assis tance there in the event of a vehicle break down.

Jump-starting Notes If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. In the same way, you can help jump-start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp han dles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce dure.

Seite 248

Mobility Breakdown assistance

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Do not touch live parts To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,

always avoid all contact with electrical compo nents while the engine is running.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in formation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehicles There must not be any contact between

the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there is a danger of shorting.

Connecting jumper cables Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.

1. Open the battery cover in the engine com partment to access the positive terminal.

2. Unlock the tabs of the positive terminal cover on the left and right, arrows 1, and raise the cover, arrow 2.

3. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to a starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

4. Attach the second clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery of the vehicle to be started.

5. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing as sistance.

6. Attach the second clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of

Seite 249

Breakdown assistance Mobility

249Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

the battery, or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Body ground:

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at a slightly in creased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse

order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towing Notes

Observe applicable laws and regulations Observe applicable laws and regulations

for tow-starting and towing.

No additional passengers Do not transport any passengers other

than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.

Using a tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the MINI. The tow fitting is stowed in the following loca tion, depending on the equipment: Under the right or left front seat. In the pouch of the wheel change set in the

cargo area. Tow fitting, information on use Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.

Access to the screw thread Push out the tow fitting cover at the appropri ate recess in the bumper.

Front

Seite 250

Mobility Breakdown assistance

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI Countryman: rear

MINI Paceman: rear

Being towed Follow the towing instructions Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle

damage or accidents may occur.

Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be un available.

Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering.

Larger steering wheel movements are re quired.

Switch on the hazard warning system, de pending on local regulations.

Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Automatic transmission Towing vehicles with an automatic trans mission

Only transport vehicles with an automatic transmission on tow trucks or with raised front wheels; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.

Towing with a tow bar Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to control vehicle response.

Correctly attach the tow bar Only secure the tow bar on the tow fit

tings; damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: Clearance and maneuvering capability will

be sharply limited during cornering. The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is attached offset.

Towing with a tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.

Seite 251

Breakdown assistance Mobility

251Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

With a tow truck: vehicles without ALL4 all-wheel drive

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Have the vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

With a tow truck: vehicle with ALL4 all- wheel drive

Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Note for vehicles with ALL4 all-wheel drive

Do not tow a vehicle with ALL4 all-wheel drive with just the front or rear axle raised; other

wise, the wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Only transport the vehicle on a flat-bed.

Tow-starting If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 248. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold; vehicles with an automatic transmission cannot be tow-started.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58. 3. Shift into 3rd gear. 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch is depressed and then slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immedi ately depress the clutch completely again.

Seite 252

Mobility Breakdown assistance

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 253

Breakdown assistance Mobility

253Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Care Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Car washes Notes

Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 /60 . Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause dam age or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the operating instructions for the high- pressure washer.

Do not direct steam or high-pressure washers toward the labels applied by the manufacturer; otherwise, damage may result.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pres sure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the seals of the retractable hardtop and the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park Dis tance Control, for instance, for extended peri ods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

During the winter months Ensure that the vehicle is washed more

frequently in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as leaves, from the area of the windshield when the hood is open.

Washing in automatic car washes Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Do not use automatic high-pressure washers; otherwise, water may drip into the interior in the area of the windows. Before driving into the car wash, check whether the system is suitable for your MINI. Note the following points: Vehicle dimensions, refer to page 260. If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, re

fer to page 51. Maximum permissible tire width.

Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle chassis could be damaged.

Preparations before driving into the car wash: Unscrew the road antenna. Deactivate the rain sensor to avoid unin

tentional wiper activation. Deactivate the rear window wiper and pro

tect it from damage. Ask the car wash oper ator about any necessary protective meas ures.

Seite 254

Mobility Care

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Remove additional attachments, for in stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if there is a risk that these may be damaged.

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

Automatic transmission Before driving into the car wash, note the fol lowing to ensure that the vehicle can roll:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Move the selector lever to position N. 3. Release the handbrake. 4. Switch the engine off. 5. Leave the remote control in the ignition

lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Hand car wash If washing the vehicle by hand, use copious quantities of water and car shampoo if neces sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or a washing brush by applying gentle pressure. Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the rain sensor to avoid unintentional wiper activa tion or switch off the ignition.

Adhere to the local regulations regarding washing cars by hand.

Headlamps Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caus tic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled, e.g., due to insects, with shampoo and rinse off with copious quantities of water. Thaw ice with a window deicer; do not use an ice scraper.

Windows Clean the outside and inside surfaces of the windows and the mirror glasses with window cleaner.

Do not clean mirror glass with cleaners contain ing quartz.

Wiper blades Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to avoid streaking. Wax and preservative residue and soiling on the windows cause streaking during window wiping and lead to premature wear on the wiper blades and malfunctions of the rain sen sor.

Vehicle care Car care products Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi cantly to vehicle value retention. The manufacturer recommends using cleaning and care products from MINI, since these have been tested and approved. Original MINI CareProducts have been tested on materials, in the laboratory, and in the field, and offer optimum care and protection for MINI vehicles.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.

Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan gerous and harmful to your health.

Seite 255

Care Mobility

255Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to vehicle value reten tion and protects the paintwork against the long-term effects of paint-damaging substan ces. Environmental influences in areas with higher air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an impact on the vehicle paint. Therefore, it is important to tailor the frequency and extent of your car care to these influences. Immediately remove especially aggressive sub stances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird droppings, to prevent damage to the paint work.

Correcting paint damage Depending on the severity of the damage, re pair stone impact damage or scratches imme diately to prevent rust formation. The manufacturer recommends having paint damage corrected with a professional repair paint job according to factory specifications us ing original MINI paint materials.

Preservation Preservation is needed when water no longer beads off of the clean paint surfaces. Only use paint preservation products that contain car nauba or synthetic waxes.

Leather care The leather processed by the manufacturer is a high quality natural product. Light graininess is a typical feature of natural leather. Particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and pre mature degradation of the leather surface. Therefore, remove dust from the leather regu larly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Make especially sure that light-colored leather is cleaned regularly as it is more susceptible to soiling.

Twice a year, treat the leather with a leather lo tion as dirt and grease will attack the protective layer of the leather.

Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to re move superficial soiling. In case of heavy soiling, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in combination with a suitable interior cleaner. Follow the instructions on the container. Clean the upholstery material down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro fasteners Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other

articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Interior plastic parts These include: Imitation leather surfaces Lamp lenses Indicator covers Matte components Clean with water and a solvent-free plastic cleaner if necessary.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.

Rubber seals Only treat with water or a rubber care product. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use silicone sprays or other care products containing sili cone; otherwise, noise and damage may result.

Seite 256

Mobility Care

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic ularly when they have been exposed to road salt. For additional treatment, use a chrome polish.

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value of 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaners or a steam jet hot ter than 140 /60 ; otherwise, damage may result. Adhere to the manufacturer instructions. Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may de stroy the protective coating of neighboring components such as the brake disc.

Exterior sensors The sensors on the outside of the vehicle, such as for Park Distance Control, must be kept clean and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully functional.

Decorative trim Clean decorative trims and fine wood compo nents with a moist cloth only. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

No chemical cleaning Do not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.

Carpets/floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving

Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again when they are returned after being re moved, such as for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed for cleaning. If they are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or an interior cleaner. To pre vent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Displays To clean the displays, such as the radio or dis play elements, use an antistatic microfiber cloth.

Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleans

ers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa ces or electrical components. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.

CD/DVD drives No cleaning CD Do not use cleaning CDs; otherwise, parts

of the drive may become damaged.

Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.

Seite 257

Care Mobility

257Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

FIND ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

At a glance

Controls

Driving tips

Navigation

Entertainment

Communication

Mobility

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Technical data Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

Engine specifications

Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Displacement cu in/cm 97.5/1,598 97.5/1,598 97.5/1,598

No. of cylinders 4 4 4

Maximum output hp 121 181 208

at engine speed rpm 6,000 5,500 6,000

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 114/155 177/240 207/280

with overboost 192/260 221/300

at engine speed rpm 4,250 1,600-5,000 1,900-5,500

with overboost 1,700-4,500 2,100-4,500

Overboost briefly increases the highest torque during rapid acceleration, for example when pass ing another vehicle.

Dimensions MINI Countryman

MINI Countryman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.5/1,995 78.5/1,995 78.6/1,996

Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789

Height without roof antenna inches/mm 61.5/1,561 61.5/1,561 61.5/1,561

Length inches/mm 161.7/4,108 161.8/4,110 163.2/4,144

Seite 260

Reference Technical data

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

MINI Countryman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,596

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6

MINI Paceman

MINI Paceman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996

Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786

Height without roof antenna inches/mm 59.8/1,518 59.9/1,522 60.1/1,527

Length inches/mm 162.2/4,120 162.2/4,120 162.8/4,134

Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6

Weights Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

MINI Countryman

Cooper Cooper S

Curb weight, road ready, with maximum special equipment

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,954/1,340 3,053/1,385

Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,020/1,370 3,097/1,405

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,858/1,750 3,990/1,810

Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,924/1,780 4,034/1,830

Load lbs/kg 860/390 860/390

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,127/965

Automatic transmission lbs/kg 2,116/960 2,172/985

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,918/870 1,918/870

Seite 261

Technical data Reference

261Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Cooper Cooper S

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 12.441.3/ 3501,170 12.441.3/ 3501,170

Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works

Curb weight, road ready, with maximum special equipment

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,208/1,455 3,263/1,480

Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,252/1,475 3,307/1,500

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,101/1,860 4,156/1,885

Automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,145/1,880 4,200/1,905

Load lbs/kg 860/390 860/390

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,183/990 2,183/990

Automatic transmission lbs/kg 2,227/1,010 2,227/1,010

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,017/915 2,072/940

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 12.441.3/ 3501,170 12.441.3/ 3501,170

MINI Paceman

Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Wor ks

Curb weight, road ready, with maximum special equipment

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,940/1,334 3,070/1,393 3,210/1,456 3,260/1,479

Automatic transmis sion

lbs/kg 3,010/1,365 3,110/1,411 3,260/1,479 3,310/1,501

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,850/1,746 3,960/1,796 4,100/1,860 4,150/1,882

Automatic transmis sion

lbs/kg 3,920/1,778 4,010/1,819 4,140/1,878 4,200/1,905

Load lbs/kg 850/386 850/386 850/386 850/386

Seite 262

Reference Technical data

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Wor ks

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,120/962 2,180/989 2,200/998

Automatic transmis sion

lbs/kg 2,120/962 2,170/984 2,220/1,007 2,240/1,016

Approved rear axle load

lbs/kg 1,910/866 1,910/866 2,020/916 2,060/934

Approved roof load ca pacity

lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/ liter

11.638.1/ 3301,080

11.638.1/ 3301,080

11.638.1/ 3301,080

11.638.1/ 3301,080

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters Approx. 12.4/ approx. 47

Fuel quality, refer to page 218

Including reserve of US gal/liters Approx. 2.1/ approx. 8

Seite 263

Technical data Reference

263Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Short commands for voice activation system Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series.Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems.

General information Instructions for voice activation system, refer to page 26.

To have the available spoken instructions read out loud: Voice commands The following short commands apply to vehi cles equipped with a voice activation system. They have no function in vehicles in which only the mobile phone is operated using the voice.

Adjusting Vehicle

Function Command

Opens the main menu. Main menu

Open the options. Options

Open the settings. Settings

Settings on the Control Display. Control display

Open the time and date. Time and date

Open the language and units. Language and units

Open the speed limit. Speed

Open the light. Lighting

Open the door lock. Door locks

Seite 264

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Vehicle information Computer

Function Command

Open the computer. Onboard info

Open the trip computer. Trip computer

Vehicle

Function Command

Open the vehicle information. Vehicle info

Open the vehicle status. Vehicle status

Navigation General information

Function Command

Navigation menu. Navigation

Open the destination entry. Enter address

Enter the address. Enter address

Enter the town/city. City

Enter the country. State

Enter the postal code. Postal Code

Open destination guidance. Guidance

Start destination guidance. Start guidance

Terminate destination guidance. Stop guidance

Open the home address. Home address

Open the route criteria. Route preference

Open the route. Route information

Switch on the spoken instruction. Switch on voice instructions

Repeat the spoken instruction. Repeat voice instructions

Seite 265

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

265Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Function Command

Switch off the spoken instruction. Switch off voice instructions

Display the address book. Address book

Display the most recent destinations. Last destinations

Open the traffic bulletins. Traffic Info

Special destinations. Points of interest

Map

Function Command

Display the map. Map

Map facing north. Map facing north

Map facing the direction of travel. Map in direction of travel

Perspective map. Map perspective view

Automatic scaling of the map. Map with automatic scaling

Scale...feet. Map scale ... feet

Scale...meters. Map scale ... meters e.g., map scale 100 meters

Scale...kilometers. Map scale ... kilometers e.g., map scale 5 kilometers

Scale...miles. Map scale ... miles e.g., map scale 5 miles

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function Command

Enter a new destination. Enter address

Seite 266

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Radio FM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... megahertz e.g., 93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5

Open the radio. Radio

Open the FM stations. F M

Open the manual search. Manual

Select a frequency range. Select frequency

Open a station. Select station

AM

Function Command

Open a frequency. Frequency ... Kilohertz e.g., fre quency 753 or 753 kilohertz

Open the AM stations. A M

Open the manual search. Manual

Satellite radio

Function Command

Open the satellite radio. Satellite radio

Switch on the satellite radio. Satellite radio on

Select a satellite radio channel. Select satellite radio e.g., satellite radio channel 2

Stored stations

Function Command

Open the stored stations. Presets

Choose a stored station. Select preset

Select a stored station. Preset ... e.g., stored station 2

Seite 267

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

267Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

CD/multimedia CD drive

Function Command

Select a track. Track ... e.g., track 5 or C D track ... e. g., CD track 5

Play back a CD. C D on

Select a CD. Select C D

Select a CD and track. C D ... track ... e.g., CD 3 track 5

Open the CD and Multimedia menu. C D and multimedia

CD. C D

External devices

Function Command

Open the external devices. External devices

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

Tone

Function Command

Open the tone settings. Tone

Telephone

Function Command

Dial a phone number. Dial number

Open the Telephone menu. Telephone

Display the phone book. Phonebook

Redialing. Redial

Display received calls. Received calls

Seite 268

Reference Short commands for voice activation system

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Function Command

List of messages. Messages

Open the Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth

Office

Function Command

Open the Office menu. Office

Display Office Today. Current office

Display the contacts. Contacts

Display the messages. Messages

Display the calendar. Calendar

Display the tasks. Tasks

Display the reminders. Reminders

Contacts

Function Command

Select a name. Choose name

My contacts. My contacts

Open the contacts. Contacts

New contact. New contact

Seite 269

Short commands for voice activation system Reference

269Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys

tem 93 Acoustic signal, refer to Check

Control 75 Activated charcoal filter with

automatic climate con trol 103

Adaptive Light Control 80 Additional telephone 190 Additives, engine oil 235 Airbags 82 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 85 Air circulation, refer to Recir

culated air mode 100, 102 Air conditioner 99 Air conditioning 99 Air conditioning mode Air conditioner 99 Automatic climate con

trol 101 Air distribution Automatic 102 Individual 100 Manual 100, 102 Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 103 Air flow rate 99, 102 Air pressure, refer to Tire infla

tion pressure 220 Air supply Air conditioner 99 Automatic climate con

trol 101 Alarm system 41 Alarm system Avoiding unintentional

alarms 41 Interior motion sensor 41 Tilt alarm sensor 41

ALL4 all-wheel system 95 All-wheel drive, refer to

ALL4 95 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 105 AM/FM station 158 Ambient lighting 81 Announcement, navigation,

refer to Spoken instruc tions 147

Antifreeze, washer fluid 64 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 93 Anti-slip control, refer to Dy

namic Stability Control DSC 93

Anti-theft protection 33 Appointments 206 Approved engine oils 235 Ashtray 108 Assistance, roadside 248 Assistance when driving off,

refer to Hill drive-off assis tant 95

Assistance with starting en gine, refer to Jump-start ing 248

Audio playback 167 Audio playback, Blue

tooth 173 Automatic Air distribution 102 Air flow rate 102 Automatic car wash 254 Automatic climate control Automatic air distribu

tion 102 Automatic, cruise control 96 Automatic headlamp con

trol 78

Automatic transmission with Steptronic Kickdown 66 Overriding selector lever

lock 67 AUTO program with auto

matic climate control 102 AUX-IN port 169 Average fuel consumption 70 Average fuel consumption Setting the units 72 Average speed 70 Average speed, refer to Com

puter 69

B Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 46 Backrests, refer to Seats 45 Backup lamps, bulb replace

ment 243 Balance 156 Bass 156 Battery Disposal 41 Remote control 32 Battery, refer to Vehicle bat

tery 246 Battery replacement Remote control 41 Belts, refer to Safety belts 47 Belt tensioners, refer to Safety

belts 47 Bi-xenon headlamps 240 Black and white map dis

play 150 Blower, refer to Air flow

rate 99, 102 Bluetooth audio 173

Seite 270

Reference Everything from A to Z

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Bluetooth connection, activat ing/deactivating 181, 191

Bluetooth hands-free sys tem 180

Brake assistant 93 Brake discs, breaking in 122 Brake fluid, refer to Service re

quirements 74 Brake force distribution, elec

tronic 93 Brake pads, breaking in 122 Brakes Handbrake 60 Brakes, MINI maintenance

system 237 Brakes, service require

ments 74 Brake system, MINI mainte

nance system 237 Braking, notes 123 Breakdown assistance, Road

side Assistance 248 Breaking in 122 Brightness on the Control Dis

play 74 Buckle tongue, rear Height adjustment 48 Button for starting the engine,

refer to Start/Stop button 58

C Calendar 206 California Proposition 65

Warning 7 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 246 Car care products 255 Care, displays 257 Care, vehicle 255 Cargo area Comfort Access 39 Flat loading floor 111 Multi-function hook 113 Opening from the out

side 37 Partition net 112

Cargo area, enlarging Cargo cover 110 Cargo area lamp, refer to Inte

rior lamps 81 Cargo area tailgate, refer to

Tailgate 37 Car horn, refer to Horn 14 Carpet, care 257 Car phone, refer to Tele

phone 180, 190 Car wash 254 CBC, Cornering Brake Con

trol 93 CBS Condition Based Serv

ice 237 CD 166 CD/DVD drives, care 257 CD player 166 Center armrest 115 Center console, refer to

Around the center con sole 18

Center rail 116 Center rail, refer to Storage

compartments 116 Central locking Comfort Access 38 From the inside 36 From the outside 34 Central locking system Concept 33 From the outside 33 Central screen, see Control

Display 20 Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 7 Changing wheels/tires 227 Check Control 75 Children, transporting 53 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 54 Child restraint fixing sys

tems 53 Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 53 Child seat, mounting 53

Child seats, refer to Transport ing children safely 53

Chrome parts, care 257 Circulation of air, refer to Re

circulated air mode 100, 102

Cleaning, displays 257 Cleaning, refer to Care 254 Climate 99 Climate mode Ventilation 103 Clock 68 Clock 12h/24h format 72 Setting the time and date 72 Closing From the inside 36 From the outside 34 Clutch, breaking in 122 Cockpit 14 Cold start, refer to Starting the

engine 59 Combination instrument, refer

to Displays 16 Combination switch, refer to

Turn signal/high beams/ headlamp flasher 61

Combination switch, refer to Washer/wiper system 61

Comfort Access In the car wash 40 Replacing the battery 41 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 18 Compartment for remote con

trol, refer to Ignition lock 58 Compass, digital 106 Computer 69 Computer, displaying informa

tion 69 Condition Based Service

CBS 237 Confirmation signals for vehi

cle locking/unlocking 35 Connecting, mobile phone, re

fer to Pairing the mobile phone 180, 191

Seite 271

Everything from A to Z Reference

271Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Consumption, refer to Aver age fuel consumption 70

Contacts 187, 203 Control Display 20 Control Display, care 257 Control Display, settings 73 Controls and displays 14 Control systems, driving stabil

ity 93 Convenient operation Windows 34 Coolant temperature 69 Cooling function, switching on

and off 103 Cooling, maximum 102 Cornering Brake Control,

CBC 93 Corrosion on brake discs 124 Cradle for telephone or mobile

phone, refer to Snap-in adapter 200

Cruise control 96 Cupholders 108 Current fuel consumption 70 Current location, storing 138 Curve lights, refer to Adaptive

Light Control 80 Cylinders, number of, refer to

Engine data 260

D Dashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 80 Dashboard, refer to Cock

pit 14 Dashboard, refer to Dis

plays 16 Data, technical 260 Date Date format 73 Setting 73 Daytime running lights 79 Decorative trim, care 257 Defogging windows 100 Defroster Rear window 100, 103

Defrosting windows 100 Defrost setting, refer to De

frosting windows 100 Destination entry via the ad

dress book 138 Destination guidance with in

termediate destinations 143 Destination input, naviga

tion 136 Digital compass 106 Digital radio 159 Dip stick, engine oil 234 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 61 Displacement, refer to Engine

data 260 Display lighting, refer to In

strument lighting 80 Displays 16 Displays and controls 14 Displays, care 257 Displays, cleaning 257 Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 16 Disposal Remote control battery 41 Distance warning, refer to

Park Distance Control PDC 97

Door key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 32

Door lock 35 Door lock, confirmation sig

nals 35 Doors, manual operation 36 Doors, unlocking and locking Confirmation signals 35 From the inside 36 From the outside 34 DOT Quality Grades 224 Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill

drive-off assistant 95 Driving notes, breaking

in 122 Driving off on hills, refer to Hill

drive-off assistant 95

Driving on poor roads 125 Driving stability control sys

tems 93 Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 122 Dry air, refer to Cooling func

tion 103 DSC Dynamic Stability Con

trol 93 DTC Dynamic Traction Con

trol 94 DTMF suffix dialing 185, 197 Dynamic destination guid

ance 152 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 93 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 94

E Electrical malfunction Door lock 36 Fuel filler flap 216 Electronic brake-force distri

bution 93 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil ity Control DSC 93

Emergency activation Automatic transmission, re

fer to Overriding selector lever lock 67

Emergency operation, fuel filler flap, unlocking man ually 216

Emergency operation, refer to Manual operation Door lock 36 Energy, saving, refer to Saving

fuel 130 Engine, breaking in 122 Engine compartment 232 Engine oil, adding 234 Engine oil, additives, refer to

Approved engine oils 235

Seite 272

Reference Everything from A to Z

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Engine oil, alternative oil types 235

Engine oil change intervals, refer to Service require ments 74

Engine oil, dip stick 234 Engine oil, filling capacity 263 Engine oil, MINI maintenance

system 237 Engine oil types, alterna

tive 235 Engine oil types, ap

proved 235 Engine, overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 69 Engine power, refer to Engine

data 260 Engine, RPM 260 Engine start, assistance 248 Engine, starting 59 Engine, starting Comfort Access 38 Engine, starting, Start/Stop

button 58 Engine, stopping, Start/Stop

button 58 Engine, switching off 60 Equipment, interior 104 ESP Electronic Stability Pro

gram, refer to Dynamic Sta bility Control DSC 93

Exchanging wheels/tires 227 Exterior mirrors 51 Exterior mirrors, adjusting 51 Exterior mirrors, folding in and

out 51 Exterior sensors, care 257 External devices 169 External temperature dis

play 68 External temperature display Changing the unit of meas

ure 72 On computer 72 External temperature warn

ing 68

Externel temperature dis play 68

F Fader 156 Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 75 False alarm, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 41 Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 47 Fault messages, refer to Check

Control 75 Filling capacities 263 Filter Refer to Activated-charcoal

filter 101 Refer to Microfilter 101 Refer to Microfilter/acti

vated-charcoal filter with automatic climate con trol 103

First aid kit 248 First aid, refer to First aid

kit 248 Flashing when locking/unlock

ing 35 Flat tire Flat Tire Monitor 86 Indicator/warning lamp 86 Run-flat tire 87 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 87 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 85 Flat Tire Monitor FTM Flat tire message 86 Initializing the system 86 Limits of the system 85 Snow chains 85 Flat tire, wheel change 245 Floor mats, care 257 FM/AM station 158 Fog lamps 80 Foot brake 123 Footwell lamps, refer to Inte

rior lamps 81

Four-wheel drive, refer to ALL4 95

Front airbags 82 Front fog lamp, bulb replace

ment 241 Front fog lamps 80 Front lamps, bulb replace

ment 241 Front passenger airbags, de

activating 83 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 85 Fuel 218 Fuel Refer to Average fuel con

sumption 70 Fuel, additives 218 Fuel, average consump

tion 70 Fuel cap, closing 216 Fuel consumption display Average fuel consump

tion 70 Fuel filler flap, closing 216 Fuel filler flap, opening 216 Fuel filler flap, unlocking in

case of an electrical malfunc tion 216

Fuel gauge 69 Fuel, saving 130 Fuel tank capacity, refer to

Filling capacities 263 Fuel tank contents, refer to

Filling capacities 263 Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca

pacities 263 Fuse 247

G Garage door opener, refer to

Universal garage door opener 104

Gasoline 218 Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 69 Gasoline quality 218

Seite 273

Everything from A to Z Reference

273Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Gas station recommenda tion 147

Gear change Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 65 Gear display, automatic trans

mission with Steptronic 65 Glass sunroof, electrical 41 Glass sunroof, electrical Convenient operation 34 Opening, closing 42 Raising 42 Remote control 34 GPS navigation, refer to Navi

gation system 134

H Halogen headlamps, bulb re

placement 241 Hand car wash, care 255 Hand-held transmitter, alter

nating code 105 Hands-free microphone 18 Hazard warning system 18 HD Radio 159 Head airbags 82 Headlamp control, auto

matic 78 Headlamp courtesy delay fea

ture 79 Headlamp flasher 61, 79 Headlamp flasher, indicator

lamp 17 Headlamps 78 Headlamps, care 255 Headlamps, cleaning, washer

fluid 64 Head restraints 50 Head restraints Adjusting the height 50 Removing 50 Heatable Windshield 103

Heating Rear window 100, 103 Seats 47 Windshield 103 Height adjustment Seats 45 High beams 79 High beams, bulb replace

ment 241 High beams, indicator

lamp 17 Hill drive-off assistant 95 Hills 124 Holder for remote control, re

fer to Ignition lock 58 Homepage 6 Hood 232 Hood, closing 233 Hood, opening 233 Hood, unlocking 233 Horn 14 House number, entering for

navigation 137 Hydraulic brake assistant 93

I Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 68 Icy roads, refer to External

temperature warning 68 Identification marks, run-flat

tires 228 Identification marks, tires 224 iDrive Changing settings 73 Changing the date and

time 72 Changing the language 73 Changing the units of meas

ure and display format 72 Setting the brightness 74 Ignition 58 Ignition key position 1, refer

to Radio ready state 58 Ignition key position 2, refer

to Ignition on 58

Ignition key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 32

Ignition lock 58 Ignition, switched off 59 Ignition, switched on 58 Indicator and warning

lamps 17 Indicator and warning lamps Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 89 Individual air distribution 100 Inflation pressure monitor, re

fer to Flat Tire Monitor 85 Inflation pressure monitor, re

fer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 87

Inflation pressure, refer to Tire inflation pressure 220

Information on the navigation data 134

Initializing Compass, refer to Calibrat

ing 107 Glass sunroof, electrical 42 Refer to Setting the time and

date 72 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 86 Instrument cluster, refer to

Displays 16 Instrument lighting 80 Instruments, refer to Cock

pit 14 Integrated key 32 Interactive map 141 Interior equipment 104 Interior lamps 81 Interior lamps Remote control 35 Interior mirror 52 Interior rearview mirror, com

pass 106 Interior temperature, setting Air conditioner 99 Automatic climate con

trol 101

Seite 274

Reference Everything from A to Z

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Internet page 6 Intersection, entering for navi

gation 137

J Jump-starting 248

K Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 38 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 38 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 32 Key, refer to Remote control

with integrated key 32 Kickdown Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 66 Knee airbag 82 Knocking control 218

L Lamp and bulb replacement,

bulb replacement 240 Lamp, replacing, refer to

Lamp and bulb replace ment 240

Lamps 78 Lamps, automatic headlamp

control 78 Lamps, parking lamps/low

beams 78 Language, changing on the

Control Display 73 Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer

to Safety belts 47 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 54 Leather, care 256 Leather care 256 LEDs, light-emitting di

odes 240

Letters and numbers, enter ing 24

License plate lamp, bulb re placement 243

Light-alloy wheels, care 257 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 240 Lighter Socket 108 Lighting Instruments 80 Lighting, lamp and bulb re

placement 240 Lighting, vehicle, refer to

Lamps 78 Light switch 78 Limit, refer to Speed limit 91 Lock buttons on doors, refer

to Locking 37 Locking From the inside 37 From the outside 34 Setting the confirmation sig

nal 35 Without remote control, re

fer to Comfort Access 38 Locking, vehicle From the inside 36 From the outside 34 Longlife oils, alternative oil

types 235 Longlife oils, refer to Ap

proved engine oils 235 Low beams 78 Low beams Automatic 78 Low beams, automatic 78 Low beams, bulb replace

ment 241 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 46 Lumbar support 46

M Main inspection, refer to Serv

ice requirements 74

Maintenance, refer to Service booklet

Maintenance, refer to Service requirements 74

Maintenance require ments 237

Maintenance system MINI 237

Malfunction Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 67 Door lock 36 Fuel filler flap 216 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 75 Manual air distribu

tion 100, 102 Manual mode, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 66

Manual operation Door lock 36 Selector lever lock, auto

matic transmission 67 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 216 Manual transmission 64 Map, destination entry 141 Map display in black and

white 150 Map view 148 Marking on approved

tires 227 Maximum cooling 102 Maximum speed, winter

tires 228 Menu operation, onboard

monitor 20 Menus, refer to Onboard

monitor operating con cept 21

Message list, traffic bulle tins 149

Messages 205 Microfilter 101

Seite 275

Everything from A to Z Reference

275Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Microfilter With automatic climate con

trol 103 MINI Connected 210 MINI Homepage 6 MINI Internet page 6 MINI maintenance sys

tem 237 MINI Mobility System 229 Minimum tread, tires 226 Mirrors 51 Mirrors, folding in and out 51 Mirrors, interior mirror 52 Mobile communication devi

ces in the vehicle 123 Mobile phone, refer to Tele

phone 180, 190 Mobility System 229 Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 7 Monitor, see Control Dis

play 20 Mounting of child restraint fix

ing systems 53 MP3 player 169

N Navigation 134 Navigation data 134 Navigation data, updat

ing 134 Navigation system Destination entry by

voice 142 Neck restraints, refer to Head

restraints 50 New wheels and tires 227 Notes 6, 207 Nozzles, refer to Ventila

tion 103

O OBD Onboard Diagnos

tics 238

OBD socket, refer to Socket for OBD Onboard Diagno sis 238

Octane number, refer to Fuel quality 218

Octane rating, refer to Gaso line quality 218

Odometer 68 Office 202 Oil additives 235 Oil level 234 Oil types, alternative 235 Oil types, approved 235 Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 238 Onboard monitor 20 Opening and closing Comfort Access 38 From the inside 36 From the outside 34 Using the door lock 35 Via the remote control 34 Opening and unlocking From the inside 37 Operating concept of the on

board monitor 20 Outside air mode Automatic climate con

trol 102 Outside air, refer to Recircu

lated air mode 100, 102 Overheating of engine, refer

to Coolant temperature 69

P Pairing, mobile

phone 180, 191 Park Distance Control PDC 97 Parking aid, refer to Park Dis

tance Control PDC 97 Parking assistant, refer to Park

Distance Control PDC 97 Parking brake, refer to Hand

brake 60 Parking lamp, bulb replace

ment 241

Parking lamps 78 Parking lamps/low beams 78 PDC Park Distance Control 97 Personal information 202 Personal Profile 32 Pinch protection Windows 43 Plastic, care 256 Pollen Refer to Microfilter 101 Refer to Microfilter/acti

vated-charcoal filter 101 Refer to Microfilter/acti

vated-charcoal filter with automatic climate con trol 103

Poor road operation 125 Position, storing 138 Postal code, entering in navi

gation 137 Power, refer to Engine

data 260 Power windows 43 Power windows, refer to Win

dows 42 Prescribed engine oils, refer to

Approved engine oils 235 Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 87

Pressure, tires 220 Pressure warning, tires 85 Profile depth, refer to Mini

mum tread depth 226 Profile, tires 225 Protective function, refer to Pinch protection Windows 43

R Radio 158 Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control with integrated key 32

Radio ready state 58

Seite 276

Reference Everything from A to Z

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Radio ready state, switched off 59

Radio ready state, switched on 58

Radio setting, refer to Radio ready state 58

Rain sensor 62 Random 167 Random playback 167 Range 70 RDS 159 Reading out loud 208 Rear 46 Rear fog lamp, bulb replace

ment 243 Rear fog lamps, indicator

lamp 17 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 243 Rear seat backrests, folda

ble 110, 111 Rearview mirror, refer to Mir

rors 51 Rear window de

froster 100, 103 Rear window, washing 63 Rear window wiper 63 Recirculated air

mode 100, 102 Recommended tire

brands 227 Redialing 186, 198 Releasing, refer to Unlock

ing 39 Remaining range for service,

refer to Service require ments 74

Remaining range, refer to Range 70

Reminders 208 Remote control Battery replacement 41 Comfort Access 38 Malfunctions 35, 40 Remote control, removing

from the ignition lock 58

Remote control, service data 237

Remote control, univer sal 104

Remote inquiry 185, 197 Replacement remote con

trol 32 Replacing wheels/tires 227 Reporting safety defects 9 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 69 Reservoir for washer fluid, re

fer to Washer fluid reser voir 64

Restraining systems Refer to Safety belts 47 Restraint systems for chil

dren 53 Retreaded tires 227 Reverse gear, manual trans

mission 65 Road, avoiding 145 Road detour 145 Roadside Assistance 248 Roadside parking lamp, bulb

replacement 241 Roadside parking lamps 79 RON gasoline quality 218 RON, refer to Fuel quality 218 Route 146 Route criteria, route 145 Route, displaying 146 Route section, bypassing 146 RPM, refer to Engine data 260 Rubber seals, care 256 Run-flat tires 228 Run-flat tires Flat tire 86 Run-flat tires, tire inflation

pressure 220 Running lights, refer to Park

ing lamps/low beams 78

S Safe braking 123

Safety 7 Safety belts 47 Safety belts Damage 50 Rear center safety belt 48 Safety belts, care 257 Safety belts, indicator/warning

lamp 50 Safety belts, reminder 50 Safety systems Safety belts 47 Safety systems, airbags 82 Satellite radio 160 Saving fuel 130 Scale, changing during navi

gation 149 Screen, see Control Display 20 Seat adjustment 46 Seat adjustment Manual 45 Seat belts Refer to Safety belts 47 Seat heating 47 Seats Adjusting 45 Heating 47 Sitting safely 45 Selector lever, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 65

Selector lever lock, overrid ing 67

Selector lever lock, refer to Changing selector lever posi tions, Shiftlock 65

Selector lever positions, auto matic transmission with Steptronic 65

Service and warranty 8 Service data in the remote

control 237 Service interval display, refer

to Condition Based Service CBS 237

Service interval display, refer to Service requirements 74

Service requirements 74

Seite 277

Everything from A to Z Reference

277Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Service requirements, CBS Condition Based Service 237

Settings Changing on the Control Dis

play 73 Language 73 Settings and information 71 Settings, configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 32 Setting the clock, 12h/24h for

mat 72 Shifting Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 66 Shifting, manual transmis

sion 64 Shift lever Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 65 Shift paddles on the steering

wheel 66 Short commands, voice acti

vation 264 Side airbags 82 Side windows, refer to Win

dows 42 Sliding/tilting sunroof Refer to Glass sunroof, elec

trical 41 Slot for remote control 58 Snap-in adapter, mobile

phone 200 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagno

sis 238 Software applications,

iPhone 210 Software part num

ber 180, 190 Software update 176 Special destinations, naviga

tion 140 Special equipment, series

equipment 6 Speed, average 70 Speed limit 91 Speed limit Setting 91

Speedometer 16 Speed, with winter tires 228 Spoken instructions, naviga

tion 147 Sport button 95 Sport program, automatic

transmission with Step tronic 66

Stability control systems 93 Start/Stop button 58 Start/Stop button, starting the

engine 59 Start/Stop button, switching

off the engine 60 Starting the engine 59 Start problems, refer to Jump-

starting 248 State/province, selecting for

navigation 136 Stations, stored 164 Station, storing 159 Status information, onboard

monitor 23 Steering wheel 52 Steering wheel Shift paddles 66 Steering wheel, adjusting 52 Steering wheel lock 58 Stopping, engine 60 Storage, tires 228 Storing the vehicle 257 Street, entering for naviga

tion 137 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 220 Summer tires, tread 225 Switches, refer to Cockpit 14 Switching off, engine 60 Switching off, vehicle 60 Symbols 6

T Tachometer 69 Tailgate 37

Tailgate Comfort Access 39 Opening/closing 37 Opening from the out

side 37 Tail lamps 243 Tank gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 69 Tasks 207 Technical changes, refer to

Safety 7 Technical data 260 Telephone 180, 190 Telephone, adjusting the vol

ume 183, 195 Temperature Air conditioner 100 Automatic climate con

trol 102 Changing the unit of meas

ure 72 Temperature, coolant, refer to

Coolant temperature 69 Temperature display External temperature 68 External temperature warn

ing 68 Setting the unit 72 Temperature warning 68 Text messages 205 Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 41 Time Setting the time 72 Setting the time zone 73 Tire age 226 Tire identification marks 224 Tire inflation pressure 220 Tire inflation pressure Pressure loss 86, 88 Tire pressure monitor, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 85 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM System limits 87 System reset 88 Warning lamp 89 Tire Quality Grading 224

Seite 278

Reference Everything from A to Z

278 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Tires Flat tire 86 Inflation pressure 220 Inflation pressure loss 89 Pressure monitoring, refer to

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 87

Tires, breaking in 122 Tires, changing 227 Tires, condition 225 Tires, damage 226 Tire size 224 Tires, minimum tread 226 Tires, retreaded tires 227 Tires, storage 228 Tire tread 225 Toll roads, route 145 Tone 156 Torque, refer to Engine

data 260 Towing another vehicle 250 Towing, being towed 250 Town/city, navigation 136 Tow-starting 250 TPM, refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 87 Traction control 94 Traffic bulletins, naviga

tion 149 Transmission Overriding selector lever

lock in case of automatic transmission with Step tronic 67

Transmission lock Refer to Changing selector

lever positions 65 Transmission, manual 64 Transporting children

safely 53 Treble, tone 156 Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 68 Triple turn signal activa

tion 61 Trip odometer 68 Trips, planning 143

Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 37 Trunk, refer to Cargo area 37 Turning lamps, refer to Adap

tive Light Control 80 Turn signal Indicator lamp 16 Turn signal, bulb replace

ment 241 Turn signals 61 Turn signals, triple turn signal

activation 61

U Uniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQG 224 Unintentional alarms, avoid

ing 41 Units Average fuel consump

tion 72 Temperature 72 Units of measure, changing on

Control Display 72 Universal remote control 104 Unlocking From the inside 37 From the outside 34 Tailgate 39 Without remote control, re

fer to Comfort Access 38 Update, software 176 Upholstery care 256 Upholstery material care 256

V Vehicle Identification num

ber 180, 190 Vehicle battery 246 Vehicle, breaking in 122 Vehicle care 255 Vehicle care, refer to

Care 254 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle paintwork, care 256

Vehicle storage 257 Vehicle, switching off 60 Vehicle wash 254 Ventilation Air conditioning 103 Version of the navigation

data 134 Video playback, iPhone 172 Video playback, snap-in

adapter 172 Voice activation Navigation 142 Voice activation, short com

mands 264 Voice activation system 26 Volume, setting 156

W Warning and indicator

lamps 17 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 75 Warning signal volumes 156 Warning triangle 248 Washer/wiper system 61 Washer/wiper system, rain

sensor 62 Washer/wiper system, washer

fluid 64 Washer fluid 64 Washer fluid reservoir 64 Washing, vehicle 254 Welcome lamps 79 Wheel change 245 Wheels and tires 220 Wheels, changing 227 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 85 Windows Closing 43 Convenient operation 34 Opening 43 Windows, care 255 Windows, defrosting and de

fogging 100 Windows, pinch protection 43

Seite 279

Everything from A to Z Reference

279Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Windshield Defrosting and defog

ging 100 Windshield, defrosting, refer

to Defrosting windows 100 Windshield wash 61 Windshield washer fluid 64 Windshield wash, rear win

dow 63 Windshield wash, reservoir for

washer fluid 64 Windshield wash, washer

fluid 64 Windshield wiper blades,

changing 239 Windshield wiper, refer to

Washer/wiper system 61 Winter storage, care 257 Winter tires 227 Winter tires Setting the speed limit 91 Winter tires, tread 225 Wiper blades, care 255 Wiper blades, changing 239 Wiper fluid 64 Word match concept, naviga

tion 25

Y Your individual vehicle Settings, refer to Personal

Profile 32

Seite 280

Reference Everything from A to Z

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 911 544 - VI/13

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Mini Connected Mini works, you can view and download the Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2014 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Mini Mini Connected as well as other Mini manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mini Mini Connected. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2014 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2014 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2014 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2014 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mini Countryman Mini Connected 2014 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.